BMW - 116i - Workshop Manual - 2012 - 2012

Contents Owner's Handbook for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW 1 SERIES. OWNER'S HANDBOOK. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 116i 118i 125i 116d 116ed 118d 120d 125d Owner's Handbook for Vehicle Congratulations on your choice of a BMW. The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will find it is to handle. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice: Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW. Also use the integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains important notes on how to operate the car, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. It also contains useful information which will help you to uphold both your BMW's operating safety and its full resale value. Updates to the printed or integrated Owner's Handbook after go‐ ing to press are located as needed in the appendix to the printed quick reference to the vehicle. Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey, BMW AG Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 © 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich. English II/12, 03 12 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Contents For quick access to a particular topic or item, please consult the detailed alphabetical index, see page 294. Entertainment 6 Communication Notes Overview 10 14 21 24 Cockpit iDrive Voice control system Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Controls 28 42 52 57 67 83 90 98 103 116 122 126 Opening and closing Adjusting Carrying children in safety Driving Displays Lights Security Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate Interior equipment Storage compartments Driving hints 132 135 137 142 Driving precautions Loads Towing a trailer Saving fuel 168 Sound 170 Radio 176 CD/multimedia 200 210 219 222 231 Telephone Office Contacts ConnectedDrive Extended BMW Online services Mobility 234 236 238 246 248 251 252 255 265 271 Refuelling Fuel Wheels and tyres Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing parts Help in the event of a breakdown General care Reference 278 Technical data 286 Short commands of the voice control system 294 From A to Z Navigation 148 Navigation system Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Notes Notes About this Owner’s Handbook The quickest access to a particular topic or item is by consulting the alphabetical index. The first chapter is recommended for an initial overview of the vehicle. Updates after going to press Updates to the Owner's Handbook after going to press are found in the appendix of the printed quick reference to the vehicle. Additional sources of information Should you require any further information, please contact your Service centre, who will be pleased to advise you. Information on BMW, for example on technol‐ ogy, on the Internet: www.bmw.com Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐ sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ tion. "..." Identifies texts on the control display for se‐ lecting functions. ›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice control system. »...« Identifies replies by the voice control sys‐ tem. Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. Symbol for components and assemblies Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner's Handbook in connection with a particular part or assembly. Vehicle Equipment This Owner's Handbook describes all models and all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. This Owner's Handbook therefore also describes and illus‐ trates equipment not present in your vehicle, for example due to selected special equipment and national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. If certain equipment and models are not descri‐ bed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Sup‐ plementary Owner's Handbooks provided. In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the control functions are arranged differently from those shown in the illustrations. Built-date The 'built-date' of your vehicle is indicated un‐ derneath the door post on the driver's door. The ‘built-date’ is defined as ‘the calendar month and the calendar year in which the body shell and the powertrain subassemblies are con‐ joined and the vehicle is driven or moved from the production line’. Status of the Owner's Handbook The high level of safety and quality of vehicles is ensured by continuous enhancement. In rare in‐ 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Notes stances, your car may therefore differ from the information supplied here. For Australia/New Zealand When reading this Owner's Handbook, please bear the following in mind: to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards, we pursue a policy of con‐ tinuous, ongoing development. Because modi‐ fications in the design of both vehicles and ac‐ cessories may be introduced at any time, your own vehicle's equipment may vary from that de‐ scribed in this manual. For the same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee that all descrip‐ tions will be completely accurate in all respects. We must therefore request your understanding of the fact that the manufacturer of your vehicle is unable to recognise legal claims based on dis‐ crepancies between the data, illustrations and descriptions in this Owner's Handbook and your own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that some of the optional equipment described in this manual is not available on Australian models due to restrictions imposed by Australian De‐ sign Rules and other requirements. Should you require any further information, please contact your Service centre, who will be pleased to advise you. Updates after going to press Updates to the Owner's Handbook after going to press are found in the appendix of the printed quick reference to the vehicle. Your own safety Your vehicle is configured for the operating con‐ ditions and registration requirements of your country. If the vehicle is to be operated in an‐ other country, your vehicle must be adapted to any prevailing different operating conditions and permit requirements. Information on possi‐ ble exclusion of warranty or warranty restrictions for your vehicle can be obtained from your Serv‐ ice centre. Maintenance and repair The advanced technology behind this car, for example the use of modern materials and highperformance electronics, means that adapted methods of maintenance and repair are re‐ quired. Always have the corresponding work performed either by a BMW Service centre or by a work‐ shop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐ sult in consequential damage and thus consti‐ tute a safety risk. Parts and accessories BMW recommends using parts and accessory products that are specifically approved for this purpose by BMW. You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv‐ ice centre for advice on genuine BMW parts and accessories, other BMW approved products and competent advice on all related matters. The safety and compatibility of these products in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts product liability for them. BMW cannot accept liability for parts or accessory products of any kind which it has not approved. BMW is unable to assess each individual prod‐ uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use on BMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can suitability be assured if an official permit has been issued for it in a specific country. Tests performed for such permits cannot always cover all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are insufficient. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Overview This summary of buttons, switches and displays serves as an initial guide. In addition, it gives you an insight into the principles behind the various ways in which functions can be performed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Overview Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Around the steering wheel 1 Safety switch for window in rear passenger compartment 40 2 Power windows 38 3 Exterior mirror operation 49 4 Glove box on the driver's side 126 Driver assistance systems Forward alert 103 Front fog lights 87 Rear fog lights 87 Side lights 83 Low-beam headlights 83 Lane departure warning 95 5 Lights 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Cockpit Automatic driving lights con‐ trol 84 Cruise control on/off, inter‐ rupt 105 Daytime driving lights 84 Adaptive Headlights 85 High-beam assistance 85 Instrument lighting 88 Paddle for Cruise Control 106 8 Instrument cluster 67 9 Buttons on steering wheel, right Entertainment source Headlight beam throw adjust‐ ment 85 6 Volume control Steering-column lever, left Voice control 21 Turn indicator 61 Telephone 200 High-beam headlights, headlight flasher 61 High-beam assistance 85 Overview Knurled wheel for selection lists 77 10 Parking lights 84 Start/stop engine and switch igni‐ tion on/off 58 Auto Start Stop function 59 On-board computer 78 11 Steering-column lever, right 7 Windscreen wipers 62 Buttons on steering wheel, left Speed limit 96 Rain sensor 62 Set speed 104 Cleaning the windows and head‐ lights 63 Resume speed 106 Rear wipers 63 12 Horn 13 Steering wheel adjustment 51 14 Unlock bonnet 246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 11 Overview Cockpit Around the centre console 1 Roof lining 13 8 Controller with buttons 14 2 Control display 14 9 Parking brake 60 3 Glove box 126 10 4 Air outlets 120 5 Park Distance Control, PDC 106 Rear view camera 109 Hazard warning flashers 265 Park assistant 112 Central locking system 31 6 Radio 170 CD/multimedia 176 7 Climate 116 12 11 Drive experience switch 99 Dynamic Stability Control, DSC 98 12 Gear selector lever 64 64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Cockpit Overview Around the headlining 1 Emergency call 265 4 Reading lights 88 2 Glass roof 40 5 Interior light 88 3 Front passenger airbag indicator lamp 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 13 Overview iDrive iDrive Vehicle Equipment Control display This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Notes Principle Switching off iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. These functions can thus be con‐ trolled from one central point. 1. ▷ To clean the control display, comply with the information regarding care. ▷ To avoid risk of damage to the control dis‐ play, please do not place objects in front of it. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display" Operate iDrive while the vehicle is in mo‐ tion Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions are appropriate. Otherwise, you may become distracted and endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.◀ Overview of controls Control functions Switch on Press the controller to switch on. Controller with navigation system Select menu items and making settings. 1. Turning. 1 Control display 2 Controller with buttons The buttons can be used to call up menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and make settings. 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 iDrive 2. Pressing. 1. Turning 3. Tilting in four directions. 2. Pressing Buttons on the controller Overview 3. Tilting in four directions. Press the button Function MENU Call up the main menu. RADIO Calls up the Radio menu. MEDIA Calls up the CD/multimedia menu. NAV Calls up the Navigation menu. TEL Calls up the Telephone menu. BACK Displays the previous screen. OPTION Calls up the Options menu. Controller without navigation system Select menu items and making settings. Buttons on the controller Press the button Function MENU Call up the main menu. AUDIO Calls up last heard audio menu, change between au‐ dio menus. TEL Calls up the Telephone menu. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 15 Overview iDrive Press the button Function BACK Call up previous table. OPTION Calls up the Options menu. Menu items in the Owner’s Handbook In this Owner's Handbook, the menu items that are to be selected are shown in quotation marks, for example "Settings". Switching between screens Operating principle Calling up the main menu Press the button. After a menu item has been selected, for exam‐ ple "Radio", a new screen is displayed. Screens can lie one on top of the other. ▷ Tilt the controller to the left. The current screen is closed and the previ‐ ous screen is displayed. Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre‐ vious screen. The current screen is not closed. ▷ Tilt the controller to the right. A new screen is opened and overlaid. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Selecting a menu item Menu items in white can be selected by high‐ lighting them. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. White arrows to the left or right indicate that other screens can be called up. View of an opened menu In general, when a menu is called up, the screen that was last selected in this menu is displayed. To display the first screen of the menu: ▷ Tilt the controller repeatedly to the left until the first screen is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. 2. Press the controller. Calling up the Options menu Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed. 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 iDrive Overview Function is disabled. Example: setting the clock Setting the clock 1. Alternatively, tilt the controller repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu is displayed. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted and press the controller. Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, for example "Split screen". Area remains unchanged. ▷ Operating options for the selected main menu, for example for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, other operating options for the selected main menu, for example "Save station". Adjusting the settings 1. Select a field. 3. If necessary, tilt the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐ lighted and press the controller. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. 3. Press the controller. Enabling/disabling functions Some menu items are preceded by a checkbox. This indicates whether the function is enabled or disabled. Selecting the menu item enables or disables the function. Function is enabled. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 17 Overview iDrive 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highligh‐ ted and press the controller. Symbols for telephone Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Reception level of mobile telephone network symbol flashes: network search. No mobile phone network available. 6. Turn the controller to set the hour and press the controller. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Bluetooth switched on. Data transfer active. Roaming active. Text message received. Status information SIM card check. Status field SIM card disabled. The following items of information are displayed in the status field on the top right: SIM card not found. ▷ Time ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output on/off. ▷ Reception level of mobile telephone net‐ work. ▷ Phone status. ▷ Reception of traffic reports. Symbols in the status field The symbols are combined in the following groups. Symbols for radio Symbols for entertainment Symbol Meaning CD/DVD player. Music collection Gracenote® database. AUX-IN port USB audio interface/Audio interface, mobile phone USB audio interface. Symbol Meaning TP Traffic Information switched on. 18 PIN required. Audio interface for mobile phone. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 iDrive Favourites buttons Other functions Symbol Meaning General Spoken instructions switched off. Split screen In the split screen view, additional information can be displayed on the right-hand side of the screen, for example information from the onboard computer. This information remains visible in the split screen view even if a switch is made to another menu. Switching the split screen view on and off Press the button. 2. "Split screen" Without navigation system and telephone On the buttons, only the radio transmitter, see page 174, can be stored. Saving a function 1. Highlight the function using the iDrive. 2. Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds. Performing a function Press the button. Selecting display 1. iDrive functions can be saved on the favourites buttons and called up directly, for example radio stations, navigation destinations, telephone numbers and shortcuts into the menu. The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. General 1. Overview Press the button. The function is carried out immediately. If you have selected a telephone number, for ex‐ ample, the connection will also be established. 2. "Split screen" 3. Tilt the controller until the split screen is se‐ lected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen display" 5. Select the desired menu item. Displaying assignment of buttons Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The assignment of the buttons is displayed at the top edge of the screen. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 19 Overview iDrive ▷ To display brief information: touch the but‐ ton. ▷ To display detailed information: touch the button for longer. Clearing assignment of buttons 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approximately five seconds. Entry comparison Input of names and addresses: the selection is gradually narrowed down and possibly supple‐ mented with every subsequent letter that you enter. Inputs are continuously compared with the data saved in the vehicle. 2. "OK" ▷ Only letters that are present in the data are offered for entry. Entering letters and digits ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ tered in the writing of any language available on the control display. General 1. Turn controller and select letters or digits. 2. If applicable, select other letters or digits. 3. Select "OK" to confirm the input. Symbol Function Press the controller: deletes a letter or digit. Press and hold down the controller: deletes all numbers or letters. Enters a space. Change between upper/lower case, numbers and symbols Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween the input of lower case or upper case let‐ ters, numbers and symbols: Symbol Function Enter letters. Enter digits. or Tilt the controller up. Without navigation system Select the 20 symbol. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Voice control system Overview Voice control system Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. The command is shown in the instrument cluster. Symbol in the instrument cluster indicates that the voice control system is active. If no further spoken commands are possible, switch to iDrive to control the function in this case. Switching off the voice control system Principle ▷ Through the voice control system most functions shown in the Control Display can be operated by spoken commands. The system supports spoken input. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated via the voice control system. ▷ The system has a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice con‐ trol system in the Owner's Handbook. Requirements On the control display set a language that is also supported by the voice control system, so that the vehicle can identify spoken commands. Setting the language, see page 81. Press the button on the steering wheel or say ›Cancel‹. Possible commands Most of the menu items on the control display can be called up by means of spoken com‐ mands. The possible commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. There are commands for the functions of the main menu. Several list entries, for example, telephone book entries, can also be selected using the voice control system. When doing this, list entries are to be spoken exactly as they are shown in the relevant list. Having possible commands read aloud Issuing voice commands Possible commands can be read aloud: ›Voice commands‹ Activating the voice control system If, for example, the menu "Settings" is displayed, the commands for the settings are announced. Press the button on the steering 1. wheel. 2. Wait for acoustic signal. 3. Issue the command. Running functions using short commands Main menu functions can be performed imme‐ diately using short commands, almost irrespec‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 21 Overview Voice control system tive of which menu item is selected, for exam‐ ple ›Vehicle status‹. 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting. List of Short commands of the voice control sys‐ tem, see page 286. Help dialogue to voice entry system Call up help dialogue: ›Help‹ Further commands for help dialogue: ▷ ›Help with examples‹: information on the current possible operations and the most important commands for this are read out. ▷ ›Help with voice input‹: information on the operating principle of the voice entry system is read out. Example: playing a CD 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output. 2. Adjusting volume Turn the volume knob during the voice instruc‐ tions until the desired volume is obtained. ▷ The volume is retained even if you change the volume of other audio sources. ▷ The volume is saved for the remote control currently in use. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›C D and multimedia‹ The last medium played is played. 4. ›C D track ...‹, for example CD track 4. Setting the speech dialogue You can set whether the system uses the stand‐ ard dialogue or the short variant, With the short variants of the speech dialogue, the system announcements are played in short‐ ened form. On the control display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" Information regarding emergency calls The voice control system should not be used for emergency calls. Under stress, the spoken lan‐ guage and voice pitch can change, which could unnecessarily delay the connection of your call. Instead, use the SOS button, see page 265, in the area of the interior mirror. Operating conditions ▷ Commands, digits and letters should be pronounced fluently, with the usual empha‐ sis, and at a normal volume and speed. ▷ Always speak the commands in the lan‐ guage of the voice control system. ▷ When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name: 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Voice control system Overview ›Station ...‹ for example, Classic Radio sta‐ tion ▷ Doors, windows and the glass roof should be kept closed to avoid noise interference. ▷ Avoid background noises in the car while you are speaking. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 23 Overview Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle The integrated Owner's Handbook can be shown in the control display. It particularly de‐ scribes the equipment and functions present in the vehicle. Owner's Handbook Here, information and descriptions can be searched via the index by directly entering a search term. Select components 1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller and select "Vehicle information". 3. Press the controller. 4. Select desired area: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Handbook" Components of the integrated Owner's Handbook The integrated Owner's Handbook consists of three parts, which provide various information depths or access possibilities. Quick Reference Important information is found in the quick ref‐ erence for the operation of the vehicle, the op‐ eration of fundamental vehicle functions or in case of breakdown. This information can also be displayed when driving. Page by page with link access Search by pictures Using the search by pictures, information and descriptions can be searched using pictures. For example, that is particularly helpful when the description of a piece of equipment is needed, which cannot be named. 24 Browsing within the Owner’s Handbook Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Page by page without link access Browse the pages directly, skipping links. Highlight the symbol once. Then simply press the controller to browse from page to page. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Browse back. Browse forward. Context-sensitive help - Owner's Handbook for the currently selected function Overview 4. Press the button again to switch back to the last displayed function. 5. Press the button again to switch back to the last displayed page of the Owner’s Handbook. Suitable information can be displayed directly. To switch continuously between the last dis‐ played function and the last displayed page of the Owner’s Handbook, repeat steps 4 and 5. As you do so, new screens are opened. Call-up when operating via iDrive Favourites buttons Switch to the Options menu directly from the application on the control display: General 1. Press the button or tilt the controller repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu appears. 2. "Show Owner's Handbook" Calling up with display of a Check Control message Directly from the Check Control message on the control display: "Show Owner's Handbook" Switching between function and Owner’s Handbook The Owner's Handbook can be stored in the fa‐ vourite buttons and called up directly. Saving 1. Select "Owner's Handbook" using the iDrive. 2. Hold down the desired button for longer than two seconds. Use Press the button. The Owner's Handbook is displayed immediately. You can use the control display to switch from a function, for example radio, to the Owner's Handbook, and then back and forth between the two displays: 1. Press the button or tilt the controller repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu appears. 2. "Show Owner's Handbook" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner’s Handbook. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Controls This chapter enables you to operate your car with greater ease, explaining in detail the features designed to make your journey safer, more comfortable and more enjoyable. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle Equipment Integrated key This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Remote control/keys Buttons on the remote control Press the button on the back of the remote con‐ trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits in the driver's door lock. Replacing the battery 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the tailgate 1. Remove the integrated key from the remote control. General The delivery specification includes two remote controls with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. See Personal Profile, see page 29. Information regarding service requirements is also saved in the remote control. See Service data in the remote control, see page 252. 28 2. Push in catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover for the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a new battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover back into position. Dispose of the old battery at an author‐ ised collecting point or hand it in to a Service centre. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing New remote controls New remote controls can be obtained from your Service Centre. Loss of remote controls A lost remote control can be blocked by the Service Centre. Emergency detection of the remote control Controls Gearbox Hold the corresponding check control message of the remote control, as illustrated, to marking of the steering column and press the start/stop button within 10 seconds with the clutch depressed. Personal Profile Principle The ignition can be switched on or the engine started even in one of the following situations: Personal profile principle ▷ Interference in the radio transmission to the remote control from external sources. Some functions of the vehicle can be adjusted to individual needs. ▷ Flat battery in the remote control. ▷ Settings are saved automatically in the cur‐ rently activated profile. ▷ Fault in radio transmission due to mobile radio device in the immediate vicinity of the remote control. ▷ Fault in radio transmission due to the charger when charging in the vehicle, for ex‐ ample, for mobile radio devices. If an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine, a Check Control message is displayed. Starting the engine in the event of emergency detection of the remote control ▷ When you unlock the vehicle, the last profile used with the remote control is recognised and called up. ▷ Personal settings are also found and called up if the vehicle has been driven in the mean‐ time by other persons with their own remote controls. Individual settings for three personal profiles and a guest profile are stored. Transferring settings The personal settings can be taken to another vehicle with the Personal Profile function. More detailed information is available from your Serv‐ ice centre. The transfer takes place: ▷ Via the USB interface in the glove box or the centre console on a USB medium. ▷ Via BMW Online. Automatic gearbox: Hold the corresponding check control message of the remote control, as illustrated, to marking of the steering column and press the start/stop button within 10 sec‐ onds with the brake depressed. Profile management Calling up profiles Independently of the remote control that is used, another profile can be called up. 1. "Settings" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 29 Controls Opening and closing Importing profiles 2. "Profiles" Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile" 3. Select a profile. The profile called up is assigned to the remote control currently used. Renaming profiles 1. "Settings" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" 2. "Profiles" The current profile is selected. USB interface: "USB device" 3. Call up "Options". Exporting profiles 4. "Rename current profile" Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. This can be beneficial for safeguarding and re‐ calling personal settings, for example if items are accidentally moved or deleted. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online": USB interface: "USB device" Resetting profiles Settings of the active profile are reset to factory settings. 1. Switch on ignition. 2. "Settings" 3. "Profiles" The current profile is selected. Using a guest profile With the guest profile, individual settings can be made without affecting the three personal pro‐ files. This can be beneficial if a driver without their own profile uses the vehicle temporarily. 4. Call up "Options". 1. "Settings" 5. "Reset current profile" 2. "Profiles" 3. The current profile is selected. 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing Controls 4. Call up "Guest". ▷ Lane departure warning: last state, on/off 5. Make the settings. ▷ Triple turn signal. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed. ▷ Locking of the vehicle: after a short time or after driving off. Show profile list at start The profile list can be shown at the start to select the desired profile. Central locking system 1. "Settings" Principle 2. "Profiles" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Show user list at start" Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be saved in a profile. More details regarding the settings at: The central locking is activated when the driver’s door is closed. The following are unlocked or locked simulta‐ neously: ▷ Doors ▷ Tailgate ▷ Fuel filler flap ▷ Collision warning: warning time, last state on/off Operating from outside ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Via the door handles on the driver's or front passenger's door. ▷ CD/multimedia: last audio source listened to. ▷ Drive experience switch: sport program ▷ Seat position: called up automatically when unlocking. ▷ Favourites buttons: assignment. ▷ Headlight courtesy delay feature: time set‐ ting. ▷ Sound: sound settings. ▷ Air conditioning system/Automatic air con‐ ditioning: settings. ▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice instructions on/off. ▷ Via the remote control At the same time as locking and unlocking via the remote control: ▷ Depending on equipment, the anti-theft alarm system is also switched on/off. The anti-theft system prevents the doors from being abel to be unlocked using the securing buttons or the door opener. ▷ The welcome lights, interior lights and cour‐ tesy lighting are switched on or off. ▷ The alarm system, see page 37, is armed or disarmed. ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC: set volume of the sound signal. ▷ Radio: saved stations, last station listened to, special settings. ▷ Rear-view camera: selection of the func‐ tions and type of display ▷ Language of the control display Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 31 Controls Opening and closing Operating from inside The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button:" Via the button for the central locking system If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. In the event of an accident of the corresponding severity, the central locking is released auto‐ matically. The hazard warning system and interior lights illuminate. Opening and closing: from outside With the remote control General Removing the remote control Persons remaining in the car or pets left inside can lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the car can be opened from the outside.◀ ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Comfort opening The windows and glass roof can also be opened simultaneously via the remote control. Keep the button on the remote control pressed. The windows and the glass roof are opened. Releasing the button stops the movement. Locking Press the button on the remote control. Unlocking Press the button on the remote control. The vehicle is unlocked. Welcome light, interior light and courtesy light are switched on. You can set how the car is unlocked. 32 4. Select the desired function: Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it cannot then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐ tional-market versions.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing Comfort closing Controls 3. "Visual signal lock/unlock" The remote control can be used to simultane‐ ously close the windows and the glass roof, as well as to fold in the exterior mirrors. Keep the button on the remote control pressed. The windows and the glass roof are closed and the exterior mirrors are folded in. Observe the closing operation Follow closing operation and ensure that nobody gets jammed.◀ Releasing the button stops the movement. Switch on interior light and courtesy lighting With the car locked, press the button on the remote control. Unlock tailgate Press the button on the remote control for approximately one second. The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked. On models fitted with certain items of equip‐ ment, the tailgate can be opened with the re‐ mote control only if the car has first been un‐ locked. To prevent being locked out, do not place the remote control in the boot. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pressed shut. Protect edges. Calling up seat, mirror setting The last adjusted driver's seat and exterior mir‐ ror position is stored for the currently used re‐ mote control. When the vehicle is unlocked, this position is called up automatically if the function has been enabled. Risk of jamming when the seat moves back If this function is used, first ensure that the foot‐ well behind the driver’s seat is clear. Otherwise, with any moving back of the seat people could be injured or objects be damaged.◀ Adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ By operating the switch or the seat adjust‐ ment. ▷ By touching a button of the seat and mirror memory. Enable setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" Sharp objects or those with sharp edges may knock against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion and damage the heating conductor of the rear window. Protect edges.◀ Acknowledgement signal of the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 33 Controls Opening and closing 3. "Last seat position aut." Only the driver's door is locked or unlocked us‐ ing the door lock. Locking the doors and tailgate together To lock all doors and the tailgate together: 1. With the doors closed, lock the car using the central locking button inside the vehicle. 2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐ senger's door. 3. Lock vehicle. Malfunction ▷ Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock or If it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the vehicle with the remote control the battery might be flat or the problem might be due to interfer‐ ence from external sources such as mobile phones, metallic objects, high-tension electric cables, radio transmitters, etc. It is only possible to lock the fuel filler flap with the remote control. In this case, lock or unlock the vehicle with the integrated key via the door lock. Manual operation ▷ Press the locking button on the front passenger's door and close the door from the outside. In the event of an electrical defect, lock or unlock the driver's door with the integrated key using the door lock. Via the door lock General Opening and closing: from inside Locking and unlocking Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it cannot then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐ tional-market versions.◀ Alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is un‐ locked using the door lock. To end this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or turn on the ignition, with spe‐ cial ID of the remote control as necessary. 34 By pressing the button, the doors and the tail‐ gate are locked or unlocked, but not dead‐ locked, when the front doors are closed. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing Unlocking and opening Controls Opening from outside ▷ Either unlock the doors together using the central locking button and then pull the door handle above the armrest or ▷ Pull twice on the door handle on each door: the first pull unlocks the door, the second pull opens the door. Automatic locking The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. ▷ Press the top half of the BMW badge. 1. "Settings" ▷ Press the button on the remote control for approximately one sec‐ 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function: ▷ "Automatic relock" The vehicle is locked automatically after a short while if no door is opened. ▷ "Lock after drive away" On driving off, the vehicle is locked au‐ tomatically. ond. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swivelled upwards. On certain national-market versions, the tailgate can only be opened with the remote control if the car has first been unlocked. Opening from inside Press the button in the driver's footwell. When the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate is un‐ locked, as long as it is not secured. Manually opening With an electrical fault. 1. Fold the rear-seat backrest forward. To do this, reach into the notch and fold for‐ wards. Tailgate Opening When opening the tailgate, ensure sufficient clearance, to avoid damage. Protect edges. Sharp objects or those with sharp edges may knock against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion and damage the heating conductor of the rear window. Protect edges.◀ 2. With the screwdriver from the on-board tool, move the lever in the tailgate lock outwards. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 35 Controls Opening and closing Tailgate is unlocked. The vehicle automatically recognises the re‐ mote control when it is in the immediate vicinity or inside the car. Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking the vehicle. ▷ Comfort closing. ▷ Unlocking the tailgate separately. ▷ Start the engine. Operating requirements Closing ▷ No external sources of interference in the vicinity. ▷ To lock, the remote control must be located outside the vehicle. ▷ Approximately two seconds need to elapse before the car can be unlocked and locked again. ▷ An engine start is only possible if the remote control is in the vehicle. The recessed handles in the tailgate lining make it easier to pull the tailgate down. Risk of trapping To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the tailgate is unobstructed.◀ Do not lay the remote control in the boot Keep the remote control with you at all times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise there is a risk of the remote control being locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Comparison with conventional remote control The above functions can be operated by press‐ ing the buttons of the remote control or using Comfort Access. Unlocking Comfort Access Principle Access to the vehicle is possible without acti‐ vating the remote control. It is sufficient to have the remote control on your person, for example in a jacket pocket. 36 Firmly grab the handle on the driver's door and front passenger's door, arrow 1. This corre‐ button on the remote sponds to pressing the control. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing Locking Controls function: sources of this nature include mobile phones, metallic objects, high-tension over‐ head cables, radio transmitters, etc. In this situation, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or via the door lock with the integrated key. Alarm system Use your finger to touch the door handle, ar‐ row 2, for approximately one second. This corresponds to pressing the the remote control. button on Principle The alarm system is triggered if: ▷ A door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened. ▷ Movements inside the vehicle. To reduce the burden on the vehicle battery, make sure that the ignition and all electrical con‐ sumers are switched off prior to locking. ▷ The car's incline changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away. Comfort closing ▷ There is an interruption in the power supply from the battery. Keep your finger pressed on the area of the door handle, arrow 2. The alarm system will respond briefly to unau‐ thorised attempts to access the car as follows: In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed. ▷ Acoustic alarm. Observe the closing operation Follow closing operation and ensure that nobody gets jammed.◀ ▷ Switching on the hazard warning flashers. Arming and disarming General Press the top half of the BMW badge of the tail‐ gate. At the same time as locking and unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or Comfort Ac‐ cess the alarm system is also armed or dis‐ armed. This corresponds to pressing the on the remote control. Door lock with alarm system armed Release tailgate individually button Do not lay the remote control in the boot Keep the remote control with you at all times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise there is a risk of the remote control being locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is un‐ locked using the door lock. To end this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or turn on the ignition, with spe‐ cial ID of the remote control as necessary. Tailgate with alarm system armed Malfunction External sources of interference in the vicinity can cause the Comfort Access system to mal‐ The tailgate can also be opened using the re‐ mote control when the alarm system is armed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 37 Controls Opening and closing Press the button on the remote control for approximately one second. On closing the tailgate, it is locked again and monitored. The hazard warning system flashes once. On models fitted with certain items of equip‐ ment, the tailgate can be opened with the re‐ mote control only if the car has first been un‐ locked. Tilt alarm sensor The incline of the vehicle is monitored. Alarm system responds, for example, when there is an attempt to steel a wheel or when tow‐ ing away. Interior movement detector To ensure perfect functioning, the windows and glass sunroof must be closed. Switching off the alarm Avoiding false alarms ▷ Unlock the car with the remote control. The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement de‐ tector can be switched off together, for example in the following situations: ▷ ForComfort Access: Pull on door handle when carrying remote control. Indicator light on the interior mirror ▷ In car washes. ▷ In two-level garages. ▷ During transport via motorail, car ferry or trailer. ▷ When there are animals in the vehicle. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector ▷ Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds: System is armed. ▷ Indicator light flashes after locking: Doors, bonnet, or tailgate are not properly closed; the rest is secured. After ten seconds, the indicator light flashes continuously. Interior protection and tilt alarm sensor are not active. ▷ The indicator light no longer illuminates af‐ ter the car has been unlocked: No attempt has been made to tamper with the vehicle. ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine is started, but for no longer than approximately five minutes: Press the button on the remote control again within 10 seconds, as soon as the vehicle is unlocked. The indicator light illuminates for approximately 2 seconds and then flashes again. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector are switched off until the next time the car is locked. Power windows General Removing the remote control Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children, for exam‐ ple, could operate the power windows and pos‐ sibly injure themselves.◀ The alarm has been triggered. 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing Controls Comfort closing, see page 37, with Comfort Ac‐ cess. After switching off the ignition Windows can still be operated: ▷ For some time with radio readiness switched on. ▷ For approximately one minute with the igni‐ tion switched off. Opening ▷ Anti-trap mechanism Push the switch as far as the resistance point. The window opens as long as the switch is held. ▷ Push the switch past the resistance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the movement. Comfort opening, see page 32, via the remote control. Risk of trapping To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the window is unobstructed during clos‐ ing.◀ Pull the switch as far as the resistance point. The window closes as long as the switch is held. ▷ The window opens again slightly. Danger of trapping despite anti-trap mechanism Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure that the windows are not obstructed as they close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk re‐ mains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.◀ No accessories on windows Closing ▷ If the closing power exceeds a certain value on closing a window, the closing operation is inter‐ rupted. Pull the switch past the resistance point. Do not attach any accessories in the movement range of the windows, as otherwise the anti-trap mechanism will be impaired.◀ Closing without the anti-trap mechanism Risk of trapping To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the window is unobstructed during clos‐ ing.◀ The window closes automatically. If an external hazard or ice on the windows does not allow you to close the windows normally, proceed as follows: The movement is stopped by pressing the switch. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Comfort operation, see page 32, via the remote control. The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and the window opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 39 Controls Opening and closing 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approximately four seconds and hold it there. The window closes without the anti-trap mechanism. Safety switch The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ dren from opening and closing the rear windows by means of the switches in the rear, for exam‐ ple. Raising the glass roof Press the top of the switch. Switching on and off Press the button. When the safety function is switched on, the LED is illuminated. ▷ Closed roof is raised. ▷ The opened roof closes to the raised position. The slid‐ ing panel remains completely open. Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when carrying children in the rear seats, otherwise careless closing of the windows could result in injury.◀ Glass roof, electric Open/close glass roof and sliding panel ▷ Push the switch to the rear to the pressure point and hold. The glass roof and sliding panel open jointly as long as the switch is held. ▷ Slide the switch to the rear over the pressure point. General Risk of trapping To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the glass roof is unobstructed during closing.◀ Removing the remote control Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could op‐ erate the roof and possibly injure themselves.◀ Glass roof and sliding panel open automati‐ cally. Pressing the switch again stops it from opening. In the same way, the glass roof is close by push‐ ing the switch forwards. The sliding panel remains open and can be closed by hand. Comfort operation, see page 32, via the remote control. Comfort closing, see page 37, with Comfort Ac‐ cess. Comfort position If the roof stops, it is not entirely open in the comfort position. This reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Opening and closing You can continue the movement by subse‐ quently pressing the button. After switching off the ignition The roof can still be opened or closed for ap‐ proximately 1 minute after the ignition has been switched off. Anti-trap mechanism If the closing power of the glass roof exceeds a certain value, the closing operation is interrup‐ ted from approximately the half-open position, or during closing from the raised position. The roof opens again slightly. Danger of trapping despite anti-trap mechanism Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure that the roof is not obstructed as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.◀ Controls Initialising the system The system can be initialised when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. With the initialisation the roof closes without the anti-trap mechanism. Risk of trapping To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the glass roof is unobstructed during closing.◀ Press the top of the switch and hold until the initialisation is com‐ plete: ▷ Initialisation begins within 15 seconds and is complete when the roof is fully closed. ▷ The roof closes without the anti-trap mech‐ anism. Closing without the anti-trap mechanism In the event of danger from outside, for example, proceed as follows: 1. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold it there. The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and the roof opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Press the switch forwards once again be‐ yond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without the anti-trap mecha‐ nism. Initialising after power failure It is possible that the roof functions are restric‐ ted after a power cut during the opening or clos‐ ing process. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 41 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle Equipment Manually adjustable seats This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Overview Safe seated position A seated position that suitably reflects your re‐ quirements is a vital condition of relaxed driving with a minimum of fatigue. 1 Forward/back In the event of an accident, the seated position plays an important role together with: 2 Thigh support 3 Seat angle ▷ Seat belts, see page 45. 4 Backrest width ▷ Head restraints, see page 47. 5 Lumbar support ▷ Airbags, see page 90. 6 Height 7 Backrest angle Seats Forward/back General No seat adjustment while the vehicle is in motion Do not adjust the seat when driving, otherwise the seat could move unexpectedly, making the driver lose control of the vehicle, leading to an accident.◀ Do not incline the backrest too far towards the rear Also, do not incline the backrest of the front pas‐ senger seat too far back when driving, otherwise there is a risk of sliding underneath the seat belt in case of accident. The protective effect of the seat belt is lost.◀ 42 Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop‐ erly. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Adjusting Height Controls Electrically adjustable seats Overview Pull the lever and add or remove pressure on the seat as required. Backrest angle 1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest angle 5 Forward/back, height, seat angle Note Pull the lever and add or remove pressure on the backrest as required. The driver's seat setting is saved for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐ locked using the remote control, this position is called up automatically if the function, see page 33, for this has been activated. Settings in detail Seat angle 1. Longitudinal direction. Pull the lever and move the seat until the desired angle is reached. After releasing the lever, sit on and get up out of the seat to make sure it en‐ gages properly. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 43 Controls Adjusting 2. Height. Thigh support 3. Seat angle. Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Lumbar support The curvature of the backrest can be altered to support the lordosis, the lumbar section of the spine. The upper edge of the pelvis and the spi‐ nal column are supported to encourage an up‐ right posture. 4. Backrest angle. ▷ Press the switch at the front/ rear. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the switch at the top/ bottom. The curvature is shifted up‐ wards/downwards. Backrest width Alter the width of the backrest via the side cushions to adjust the lateral support. 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Adjusting Seat heating, front Controls ▷ Both belt anchorages incorporated into the rear bench seat are determined for those sitting on the left and right. ▷ The inner seat belt buckle of the rear seat bench is intended exclusively for the vehicle occupant in the middle. One person per seat belt Never restrain more than one person with each seat belt. Babies or small children must not travel on the lap of another occupant.◀ Switch on Fastening the seat belt Press the button once per temperature stage. Maximum temperature is indicated by three LEDs. If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐ nutes, the seat heating automatically activates with the last temperature set. Switch off Press and hold down the button. LEDs go out. Seat belts Number of seat belts Your vehicle has been fitted with five seat belts for the safety of you and your passengers. How‐ ever, they can only offer protection when adjus‐ ted correctly. Notes Before driving off, always make sure that all oc‐ cupants have fastened their seat belts. The airbags are a complementary safety feature and not a substitute for the seat belts. ▷ The upper belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is correctly adjusted. Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis and shoulder as close as possible to the body and make sure that it is positioned low at the hip in the area of the pelvis and is not pressing on your midriff. Otherwise, the seat belt can slip over the hip and injure the midriff in the event of a head-on collision. The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It should not be pulled across sharp edges or routed or fastened over hard or fragile objects.◀ Impairment of the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the seat belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be im‐ paired.◀ Warning Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos‐ sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 45 Controls Adjusting should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. Seat belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is forbidden to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant’s lap. Fastening the seat belt It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if dam‐ age to the assembly is not obvious.◀ Warning No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to re‐ move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.◀ Adjustment for automatic retracting seat belts ▷ Draw the buckle tongue attached to the seat belt across the body and press it into the buckle catch until a ‘click’ is heard. ▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very impor‐ tant. To adjust the lap belt and check whether the buckle has locked correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder strap until the lap belt fits tightly. ▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself automatically to allow freedom of movement. ▷ To release the seat belt, press the button on the buckle catch unit. The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage. Unfastening the seat belt 1. Hold onto the belt. 2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back up to the reel. Seat belt reminder for driver's and front passenger's seat A Check Control message is displayed. Check whether the seat belt has been fastened correctly. The seat belt reminder is activated when the seat belt on the driver's side is not fastened. On some national versions, the seat belt reminder is also activated above approximately 8 km/h, 5 mph if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened or if heavy objects are located on the seat. Not for Australia/New Zealand: Belt reminder for rear seats The indicator light in the instru‐ ment cluster is illuminated after the engine starts. ▷ Green: seat belt fastened on the corresponding rear seat. ▷ Red: seat belt not fastened on the corre‐ sponding rear seat. The seat belt reminder will also be activated if a rear seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Adjusting Damaged seat belts Controls Adjust height In the event of stress due to an accident or dam‐ age: Replace the belt system, including the seat-belt tensioner, and have the belt anchorage checked. Checking and replacing the seat belts Only have this work carried out at the Serv‐ ice Centre, as otherwise correct functioning of this safety device is not ensured.◀ Front head restraints ▷ Up: pull ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint downwards. Correctly adjusted head restraint Removing Head restraints adjusted to the correct height reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event of an accident. Only remove the head restraint if no-one will be sitting on the seat in question. Adjusting head restraint Adjust the head restraint correctly for all occupied seats, as otherwise there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is ap‐ proximately at the height of your ear. Spacing Adjust the spacing so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the spacing using the incline of the seat backrest. 1. Pull up the head restraint until it stops. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint fully out. Before carrying passengers Install the head restraints again before carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐ straints do not offer protection.◀ Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint Head restraints adjusted to the correct height reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event of an accident. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 47 Controls Adjusting Adjusting head restraint Adjust the head restraint correctly for all occupied seats, as otherwise there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is ap‐ proximately at the height of your ear. Adjust height ▷ Fold downwards: press button, arrow 1, and press the head restraint down. ▷ Folding upwards: pull head restraint up‐ wards. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no-one will be sitting on the seat in question. ▷ Up: pull ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint downwards. The height of the centre head restraints cannot be adjusted. Fold down head restraint Fold in/out head restraints Only fold in head restraints again, if occu‐ pants are carried in the rear. Fold out folded-in head restraints again if occupants are carried in the rear, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in case of accident.◀ 48 1. Pull up the head restraint until it stops. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint fully out. Before carrying passengers Install the head restraints again before carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐ straints do not offer protection.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Adjusting Controls Seat and mirror memory The relevant seat adjustment is done automat‐ ically. General The process is cancelled if a seat adjustment switch or one of the buttons is pressed. Safety function 1. Close the driver’s door or switch the ignition on. 2. Keep button 1 or 2 pressed as desired until the adjustment procedure has been conclu‐ ded. You can save and recall two different positions for the driver's seat and exterior mirrors for each remote control. Settings for backrest width and lumbar support are not saved. After a short time, calling up saved seat posi‐ tions is disabled to prevent the battery from be‐ ing discharged. To reactivate calling up: Saving 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Set desired position. 3. Calling up has been disabled Press the button. LED in button is illuminated. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. LED turns off. If the M button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again. ▷ Open or close a door or the tailgate. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the start/stop button. Mirrors Exterior mirrors Overview LED turns off. Recalling Do not call up the memory while the vehi‐ cle is in motion Do not call up the memory while the vehicle is in motion, otherwise an unexpected seat or steer‐ ing wheel movement may cause an accident.◀ 1 Adjusting Convenience function 2 Left/right, automatic parking function 1. Open the driver’s door. 3 Folding in and out 2. Switch the ignition off. 3. Briefly press button 1 or 2 as desired. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 49 Controls Adjusting General Deactivating Correctly estimating distance Objects reflected in the mirrors are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from following traffic based on what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.◀ Depending on the equipment, the mirror setting is saved for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control, this position is called up automatically if the setting for this has been enabled. Selecting a mirror Switching to other mirror: Push mirror changeover switch. Electrical adjustment Corresponding to movement of button Push mirror changeover switch into position for front passenger's mirror. Folding in and out Press the button. Possible up to approximately 20 km/h, 15 mph. An advantage, for example ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ When folding mirrors back out that have been folded in manually. Folded-in mirrors automatically fold out at ap‐ proximately 40 km/h, 25 mph. Folding mirrors in a car wash Before driving through a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually or by pressing button; oth‐ erwise, they could be damaged due to the width of the car.◀ Saving positions Automatic heating Seat and mirror position memory, see page 49. Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated with the engine running. Adjusting manually In the event of an electrical defect, for example, press the borders of the mirror glass. Automatic parking function Automatically dimming Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mirror, see page 51, are used for control. When reverse gear is engaged, the glass of the mirror on the front passenger side tilts slightly down. This improves the view of the kerb or other obstacles near the ground, for example when parking. Activating 1. Push mirror changeover switch into position for driver's mirror. 2. Engage transmission position R. 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Adjusting Interior mirror Steering wheel Reducing glare General Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst the vehicle is in motion Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the vehicle is in motion, or an accident may result from any unexpected movement.◀ Electric steering wheel lock From behind when driving at night: turn button. Interior mirror, automatic-dim Principle With manual transmission: The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver's door is opened. Switch on ignition to unlock. Switch on ignition Before moving the vehicle, switch on the ignition, otherwise the electric steering wheel lock is not locked and the vehicle cannot be steered.◀ Adjusting The function is controlled by photocells: ▷ In the mirror glass ▷ On the back of the mirror Operating requirements To keep the system functioning properly: ▷ Keep photocells clean. ▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the inte‐ rior mirror and windscreen. 1. Fold the lever downwards. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi‐ tion. 3. Swing the lever back up. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 51 Controls Carrying children in safety Carrying children in safety Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Important considerations front and side airbags on the passenger's side are disabled. Front passenger airbags can only be deactivated with the key switch for front pas‐ senger airbags, see page 92. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If you fit a child restraint system in the front passenger’s seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise a child travelling on that seat will face an increased risk of injury if the airbags are deployed, even if a child re‐ straint system is used.◀ Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.◀ Not for Australia/New Zealand: Suitable seats Generally, the front passenger seat and the outer rear seats are suitable for the installation of universal child restraints for all ages that have been approved for the age group in question. Always carry children at the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat. Carry children at the rear Children under the age of 12 or smaller than 150 cm, 5 ft should always travel in the rear in appropriate child restraints, otherwise there is a greater risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent.◀ Fitting child restraints Child restraint systems Suitable child restraint systems are available from your Service Centre for every class of age or weight. Before installation Make sure backrests are engaged before fitting child restraints. Notes Manufacturer specifications for child re‐ straints When selecting, installing and using child re‐ straint systems, follow the manufacturer’s infor‐ mation, otherwise the protection may be affec‐ ted.◀ Child restraint systems following an acci‐ dent Not for Australia/New Zealand: Children on the front passenger's seat Following an accident, all components of the child restraint system and the seat belt that was used to secure it should be checked and re‐ newed if necessary. If it becomes necessary to use a child restraint in the front passenger's seat, make sure that the This work should only be carried out by your Service Centre.◀ 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Carrying children in safety For Australia/New Zealand Installation of child restraints Please note the following warning because your vehicle has been equipped with a front airbag for the front passenger seat that cannot be deacti‐ vated: It is recommended not to use any kind of child restraint system in the front pas‐ senger’s seat. Controls change the backrest width from this point on and do not call up a memory position. Backrest width for child’s seat Before fitting a child restraint system in the front passenger’s seat, the backrest width must be fully open. Do not change the setting while the child restraint system is fitted, as otherwise the stability of the child’s seat will be restric‐ ted.◀ Extreme hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.◀ ISOFIX child seat mountings Note Not for Australia/New Zealand: On the front passenger's seat Deactivating airbags Before fitting a child restraint in the front pas‐ senger's seat, make sure that the front and side airbags on the passenger's side are disabled. Deactivating the front passenger airbags with key switch, see page 92. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If you fit a child restraint system in the front passenger’s seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise a child travelling on that seat will face an increased risk of injury if the airbags are deployed, even if a child re‐ straint system is used.◀ Seat position and height Before mounting a universal child restraint, bring the front passenger's seat to the rearmost and the uppermost position to achieve the best possible routing of the belt and protection in the event of an accident. Do not change this seat position and height. Backrest width Note for Australia: ISOFIX child seats are not al‐ lowable for road use in Australia at the time of printing of this handbook. However, also since a change of the respective regulations is expec‐ ted for the future, lower ISOFIX anchorages are supplied in line with applicable ADRs also for Australia. Manufacturer specifications for ISOFIX child restraints For fitting and using ISOFIX child restraints, ob‐ serve the operating and safety instructions of the system’s manufacturer, as the protective ef‐ fect could otherwise be impaired.◀ Suitable ISOFIX child restraints The following ISOFIX child restraints may be used in the rear seats. The corresponding classes are located on the child seats as letters or ISO specifications. On the Rear Seat A - ISO/F3 C - ISO/R3 B - ISO/F2 D - ISO/R2 B1 - ISO/F2X E - ISO/R1 F - ISO/L1 G - ISO/L2 With adjustable backrest width: before fitting a child restraint system in the front passenger’s seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 53 Controls Carrying children in safety Depending on the size of the child restraint sys‐ tem, push the head restraint up and adjust the longitudinal setting of the front seat. Mounting points Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors Properly engage the lower ISOFIX an‐ chors Make sure that the lower ISOFIX anchors are correctly locked in place and that the child re‐ straint system is seated firmly against the back‐ rest, as otherwise the protective effect can be diminished.◀ Before fitting ISOFIX child restraints, pull the belt away from the area of the child seat mount‐ ings. The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are located behind the marked covers. Fitting ISOFIX child restraint systems 1. Fit the child restraint system, see instruc‐ tions of the system. 2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors have snapped into place. Upper ISOFIX retaining strap There are two mounting points for the upper re‐ taining strap of ISOFIX child restraints. Mounting points There are three mounting points for the upper retaining strap of ISOFIX child restraints. Guide of the retaining strap Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap is guided to the upper mounting point without touching the head restraint or sharp edges and it is not twisted, otherwise the seat belt cannot secure the child restraint appropriately in the event of an accident.◀ Note ISOFIX securing eyelets Only use the fastening eyes of the upper ISOFIX holding belt for fastening child restraint systems, otherwise the fastening points may be damaged.◀ 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Carrying children in safety Controls Each seating position is fitted with a head rest. Warning 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for the upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eyelet 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by cor‐ rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum‐ stances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equip‐ ment to the vehicle. After using and removing child restraints, fold away the anchor brackets if necessary.◀ Mounting points Attach the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise or remove the head restraint as nec‐ essary. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint mounts. 3. Engage the hook of the retaining strap in the securing eyelet. 4. Pull the restraining strap firmly down. 5. Lower and engage the head restraint as nec‐ essary. For Australia/New Zealand: Child restraints There are three mounting points for the upper retaining strap of ISOFIX child restraints. Guide of the retaining strap Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap is guided to the upper mounting point without touching the head restraint or sharp edges and it is not twisted, otherwise the seat belt cannot secure the child restraint appropriately in the event of an accident.◀ Notes In accordance with ADR 34/01, provisions have been made to allow installation of a child re‐ straint at each rear seating position. The anchoring hooks which belong to the upper restraining strap of the child restraint - AS 1754, can be applied immediately to the relevant mounting. Please refer strictly to the installation instruc‐ tions supplied with the child restraint system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 55 Controls Carrying children in safety The door in question can now only be opened from the outside. Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver’s door if children are travelling in the rear. Various functions are blocked and cannot be operated in the rear, safety switch, see page 40. 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for the upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eyelet 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap Attach the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise or remove the head restraint as nec‐ essary. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint mounts. 3. Engage the hook of the retaining strap in the securing eyelet. 4. Pull the restraining strap firmly down. 5. Lower and engage the head restraint as nec‐ essary. Securing doors and windows Rear doors Push down the locking levers on the rear doors. 56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so that an engine start remains possible. ▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the radio ready state will be automatically activated when the door is opened if the light is not illuminated or the daytime driving lights are illuminated. Ignition off Start/stop button Automatic transmission: Press the start/stop button again without applying the brakes. Principle Manual transmission: Press the start/stop but‐ ton again, do not apply the clutch. The ignition is switched on or off and the engine is started by pressing the start/stop button. Automatic transmission: The en‐ gine starts if the brakes are ap‐ plied when the start-stop button is pressed. Manual transmission: The engine starts when the brake is applied when pressing the start/stop button. Ignition on Automatic transmission: Press the start/stop button without applying the brakes. Manual transmission: Press the start/stop but‐ ton, do not apply the clutch. All systems are ready to operate. Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster are illuminated for different lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems. The ignition switches off automatically: ▷ If the vehicle is locked and the low-beam headlights are switched on. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster ex‐ tinguish. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems. Transmission position P with the ignition switched off With the ignition switched off, transmission po‐ sition P is engaged automatically. Make sure that in a car wash, for example, the ignition is not switched off inadvertently.◀ Ignition automatically switches off with a sta‐ tionary vehicle and engine shut off: ▷ When locking, even with the low-beam headlights switched on. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so that an engine start remains possible. This function is only available with the low-beam headlights switched off. ▷ When opening and/or closing the driver's door, if the driver's belt is unfastened and the low-beam headlights are switched off. ▷ When the driver's belt is unfastened, if the driver's door is opened and the low-beam headlights switched off. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 57 Controls Driving When switching off the ignition by opening or closing the driver's door or unfastening the driv‐ er's belt, the radio availability remains active. Starting proceeds for a certain time automati‐ cally and stops as soon as the engine is started. Radio ready state Stopping the engine Activate radio ready state: ▷ Press the on/off button on the radio when the ignition is switched off. ▷ When the engine is running: press the start/ stop button. Individual electrical systems remain ready to op‐ erate. Radio ready state switches off automatically: ▷ After approximately eight minutes. ▷ When locking via the central locking system. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so that an engine start remains possible. General Removing the remote control To avoid the risk of children starting the engine, always take the remote control with you when you leave the car.◀ Apply the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required When parking, apply the parking brake firmly to prevent the car from rolling. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐ cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ Engine start Before entering a car wash Diesel engine So that the vehicle can roll into the car wash, follow the information on washing in an auto‐ matic car wash, see page 271. With the engine cold and at temperatures below approximately 0 ℃, 32 ℉, the starting operation can be delayed slightly due to automatic pre‐ heating. A Check Control message is displayed. Manual gearbox Starting the engine 1. Press the brake. 2. Depress the clutch and engage idle position. 3. Press the start/stop button. Starting proceeds for a certain time automati‐ cally and stops as soon as the engine is started. Automatic gearbox Starting the engine 1. Press the brake. 2. Press the start/stop button. 58 Manual gearbox Stopping the engine 1. Press the Start/Stop button when the vehi‐ cle is at standstill. 2. Engage first gear or reverse. 3. Apply the parking brake. Automatic gearbox Stopping the engine 1. With car at a standstill, engage transmission position P. 2. Press the start/stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on. 3. Apply the parking brake. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving Controls Auto Start Stop function Note Principle The engine is not shut down automatically in the following situations: The Auto Start Stop function helps you to save fuel, by stopping the engine when stationary, for example, in a traffic jam or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. For driving off, the engine starts automatically. Automatic operation After every time you start the engine, the Auto Start Stop function is operational. ▷ Ambient temperature below approximately +3 ℃/+37 ℉. ▷ High outside temperature and operation of the automatic air conditioning. ▷ Interior not heated or cooled to the desired temperature. ▷ Engine is not yet at operating temperature. ▷ Sharp steering angle or steering operation. The function is activated from a certain speed: ▷ After reversing. ▷ Manual gearbox: from 5 km/h, 3 mph. ▷ Condensation when the automatic air con‐ ditioning is switched on. ▷ Automatic transmission: from 9 km/h, ap‐ proximately 5 mph. Stopping the engine The engine is automatically shut down when stationary under the following conditions: Manual gearbox: ▷ Transmission in neutral and clutch pedal not pressed. ▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door closed. Automatic gearbox: ▷ Selector level in gear position D. ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is at a standstill. ▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door closed. The air flow rate of the air conditioning system is reduced when the engine is not running. Displays in the instrument cluster The display READY in the revo‐ lution counter indicates that the Auto Start Stop function is ready for automatic engine starting. ▷ Vehicle battery in a low state of charge. ▷ Bonnet is unlocked. ▷ Parking assistant is activated. ▷ Stop/go traffic. ▷ Gear selector lever in N or S/M position. Engine start For driving off, the engine automatically starts under the following conditions: ▷ Manual gearbox: Clutch pedal is depressed. ▷ Automatic gearbox: By releasing the brake pedal. After starting the engine, accelerate as normal. Safety function After an automatic shut down, the engine will not restart automatically if one of the following con‐ ditions is satisfied: ▷ Driver's seat belt unbuckled and driver's door open. ▷ Bonnet has been unlocked. Several indicator lights illuminate for various lengths of time. The engine can only be started using the start/ stop button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 59 Controls Driving Note Even if you do not want to drive off, the engine restarts automatically in the following situations: ▷ Very high temperature inside the passenger compartment, if the cooling function is on. ▷ The driver applies lock to the steering wheel. ▷ Automatic transmission: change the gear position from D to N, R or M/S. ▷ Automatic transmission: change the gear position from P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ Vehicle starts to roll. ▷ Condensation when the automatic air con‐ ditioning is switched on. ▷ Vehicle battery in a low state of charge. ▷ Very low temperature inside the passenger compartment, if the heating is on. ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated. Parking the vehicle during automatic engine stop With automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be parked safely, for example in order to leave it. 1. Press the start/stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. Automatic transmission: transmission posi‐ tion P is automatically engaged. 2. Apply the parking brake. Start engine as usual, using the start/stop but‐ ton. Automatic deactivation ▷ Low brake vacuum, for example because the brake pedal has been depressed a number of times in succession. In certain situations the Auto Start Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety's sake, for example if the absence of the driver is detected. Manually deactivating/activating the system Malfunction Using the button The Auto Start Stop function no longer shuts down the engine. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to keep driving. Have the system checked. Parking brake Applying The lever engages itself after pulling up. Releasing Press the button. ▷ LED illuminates: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. During an automatic engine stop, the engine is started. The engine can be started or stopped only by means of the start/stop button. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving Pull up the lever a bit, press the button and guide the lever down. Controls Indicating Notes Use while the vehicle is in motion If, exceptionally, use while the vehicle is in motion is necessary, do not pull on the parking brake too powerfully. Keep pressing the button on the lever. Otherwise too powerful pulling on the parking brake can cause the rear wheels to lock and the associated swerving of the vehicle rear.◀ Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To avoid corrosion and one-sided braking ef‐ fect, slightly pull on the parking brake from time to time when moving away, if traffic conditions allow. If the indicator light flashes more rapidly than usual, a turn indicator bulb has failed. The brake lights do not illuminate when the parking brake is applied. To cancel the signal manually, press the lever as far as the resistance point. Triple turn signal Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn indicator flashes three times. Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight flasher This function can be enabled or disabled. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" Turn indicator Do not fold in exterior mirror 3. "Triple turn signal" When driving and when operating the turn indicator/hazard warning indicator do not fold in exterior mirror, as otherwise the additional indi‐ cators in the exterior mirror do not have the pre‐ scribed position and it is difficult to detect them.◀ Indicating a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 61 Controls Driving High-beam headlights, headlight flasher When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers switch to normal speed. Switching off and flick-wiping ▷ High-beam headlights, arrow 1. ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2. Press the wiper lever downwards. The lever returns to the basic position when re‐ leased. Wiper system ▷ Flick-wiping: press downwards once. Switching the wipers on/off and flickwiping No wiper operation in the event of frost Do not switch on the wipers when they are frozen, as otherwise the wiper blades and wind‐ screen wiper motor can be damaged.◀ ▷ Switching off normal mode: press down‐ wards once. ▷ Switching off fast mode: press downwards twice. Intermittent operation or rain sensor Principle Switch on The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the rain intensity. The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, directly in front of the interior mirror. Activating/deactivating Press the wiper lever upwards. The lever returns to the basic position when re‐ leased. ▷ Normal wiping speed: press upwards once. When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers switch to intermittent operation. ▷ Rapid wiping speed: press upwards twice or press once beyond the resistance point. 62 Press the button on the wiper lever. The LED in the steering-column lever is illumi‐ nated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving Disable the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic car wash to prevent the wipers from being acti‐ vated inadvertently and damaged.◀ Controls Do not use the washer systems if the fluid res‐ ervoir is empty, or the washer pump will be dam‐ aged.◀ Windscreen washer jets Set interval time or sensitivity of the rain sensor Both windscreen washer jets are automatically heated when the ignition is switched on. Switching on rear window wiper Turn the knurled wheel. Cleaning the window glass, headlights Push the lever forwards to activate intermittent operation. Engaging reverse gear activates con‐ tinuous operation. To clean the rear window push the lever further forward. Fold-out position of the wipers Helpful, for example for replacing the wiper blades or folding them out in the event of frost. 1. Switch the ignition off. Pull the lever. Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed onto the windscreen and the wipers are oper‐ ated briefly. When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the headlights are also cleaned simultaneously at practical intervals. Do not use the washer system in the event of frost Only operate the washer systems and cleaning equipment if you are certain that the fluid will not freeze on the windscreen and interfere with the view ahead. Therefore, use anti-freeze. 2. If there is a risk of frost, make sure that the wiper blades are not frozen. 3. Press the wiper lever upwards beyond the resistance point and hold it there for approx‐ imately three seconds until the wipers come to a standstill in a nearly vertical position. After folding the wipers in, the wiper system must be reactivated. Folding the wipers onto the windscreen Before switching on the ignition, fold the wipers onto the windscreen, as otherwise dam‐ age can occur when the wipers are switched on.◀ 1. Switch on ignition. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 63 Controls Driving 2. Press the wiper lever downwards. The wip‐ ers move to the rest position and are opera‐ tional once again. Manual gearbox Shifting gears Shifting into the 5th/6th gear level Washer fluid General Anti-freeze protection for washer fluid Anti-freeze is flammable. This is why it should be kept away from naked flames. Only store in the sealed original container and out of reach of children. Comply with the instructions on the container.◀ Reservoir for washer fluid Topping up washer fluid Only top up washer fluid when the engine has cooled down and then fully close the lid to prevent washer fluid from making contact with hot engine components. Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk of fire and personal safety is endangered.◀ During the shifting process into 5th/6th gear level, push the gear shift lever to the right, otherwise, an inadvertent switching to the 3rd of 4th gear could lead to engine damage.◀ Reverse gear Engage this position only when the car is sta‐ tionary. Overcome the resistance when press‐ ing the gearshift lever to the left. Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions D Drive, automatic position Use this position for all normal driving. All for‐ ward gears are selected as necessary. R Reverse Engage this position only when the car is sta‐ tionary. N Neutral Select this in a car wash, for example. The car will be able to roll. All washer jets are supplied from one tank. With the ignition off, see page 57, transmission position P is engaged automatically. When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has been added if required, always follow the man‐ ufacturer’s instructions. P Park Before topping up, mix the washer fluid to com‐ ply with the mixture ratio. Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ cally: See technical data for capacity. ▷ After stopping the engine in the radio ready state, see page 58, or ignition off, see page 57, when position R or D is engaged. 64 Engage this position only when the car is sta‐ tionary. The driven wheels are locked. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving ▷ Position N is engaged and ignition is off. ▷ If the vehicle is at a standstill and selector lever position R or D is engaged, the driver's side seat belt is stored, the driver's door is opened and the brake is not depressed. Controls When you let go of the selector lever, it returns to the central position. Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the au‐ tomatic gearbox is engaged in the P position. The car could otherwise start to move. Kick-down Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the regular full-throttle position; resist‐ ance will be felt. Press the unlock button to: ▷ Engage R. ▷ Shift from P. Engaging transmission positions ▷ It is only possible to move from transmission position P with the engine running and the brake pressed. Engaging P ▷ Before shifting from P or N when the vehicle is stationary, first press the brake, otherwise the desired gearshift will not be performed: shiftlock. Apply the brake until you are ready to move off Apply the brake until you are ready to move off; this will prevent the car creeping when a gear is selected.◀ Press button P. Sport program DS and M/S manualshift mode Engage D, R, N Activating the Sport program DS Briefly press the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, possibly overcoming a resistance point. Press the selector lever out of position D to the left. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 65 Controls Driving DS is shown in the instrument cluster. The Sport program of the gearbox is activated. Shift paddles for sport automatic transmission Activating M/S manual-shift mode Press the selector lever out of position D to the left. Press the selector lever forwards or backwards. Manual operation becomes active and the gear is shifted. The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ ment cluster, for example M1. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ wards. ▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐ wards. Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the transmission will not shift down if the result‐ ing engine speed would be too high. The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use. Manual shift mode M/S: avoiding automatically changing up To reach the maximum the engine speed in manual shift mode M/S it automatically upshifts as needed. With the sport automatic gearbox, these auto‐ matic shift processes are not carried out if one of the following conditions is met: ▷ DSC deactivated ▷ TRACTION activated ▷ SPORT+ activated The shift paddles on the steering wheel enable fast gearshifting without taking the hands off the steering wheel. If you switch gear with the shift paddles whilst in automatic mode, the vehicle switches to manual mode briefly. If you neither shift with the shift paddles nor ac‐ celerate for a certain time, the vehicle changes back to automatic mode, provided the selector lever is in gear position D. ▷ Change up: pull right paddle. ▷ Change down: pull left paddle. Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the transmission will not shift down if the result‐ ing engine speed would be too high. The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use. Displays in the instrument cluster The gear box position is displayed, for example: P. The Kick-down is also deactivated. Switching off the Sport program/ manual operation Press the selector lever to the right. D is shown in the instrument cluster. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Instrument cluster Overview, Instrument cluster 1 Speedometer 4 Electronic displays 69 2 Indicator and warning lights 70 5 Fuel gauge 72 3 Revolution counter 72 6 Display/reset kilometres 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 67 Controls Displays Overview of instrument cluster with extended functionality 1 Speedometer 4 Electronic displays 69 2 Indicator and warning lights 70 5 Fuel gauge 72 3 Revolution counter 72 6 Display/reset kilometres 73 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Controls Electronic displays Overview, Instrument cluster 1 Messages, for example, Check Con‐ trol 70 Kilometres/trip odometer 72 On-board computer 78 Time 73 ECO PRO bonus range 143 Date 73 2 Outside temperature 73 Selection lists 77 Gear Indicator 66 Shift point indicator 75 3 Status, drive experience switch 99 Service requirements 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 69 Controls Displays Overview of instrument cluster with extended functionality 1 Fuel gauge 72 Speed Limit Information 76 2 Kilometres/trip odometer 72 ECO PRO bonus range 143 Outside temperature 73 3 Time 73 Gear Indicator 66 Current fuel consumption 73 Date 73 Energy recuperation 74 Selection list, for example radio 77 4 Messages, for example, Check Con‐ trol 70 5 Navigation display 148 Service requirements 74 Navigation display 148 On-board computer 78 Check Control Indicator and warning lights Principle The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys‐ tems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster. If applicable, the text message shown in the con‐ trol display is accompanied by an additional acoustic sound. 70 Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a variety of combinations and colours. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays When the engine starts or the ignition is switched on, the functionality of some lights is briefly checked. Overview: indicator and warning lights Controls Symbol Function or system Runflat indicator Seat belts Symbol Function or system Turn indicator Seat belt reminder for rear seats Front fog lights Airbag system Rear fog light Steering system High-beam headlights Emissions High-beam assistance Parking brake Brake system Side lights, low-beam headlights Anti-lock Brake System, ABS Forward alert At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored (symbol in dis‐ play) Speed limit, adjustable Text messages Cruise Control Lane departure warning Dynamic Stability Control, DSC Dynamic Stability Control, DSC de‐ activated, or Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol, DTC activated Text messages and symbols in the instrument cluster explain the meaning of a Check Control message. Supplementary text messages You can call up additional information, for exam‐ ple the cause of the fault and any action re‐ quired, via Check Control. The supplementary text is automatically shown in the Control Display for urgent messages. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 71 Controls Displays Symbols 3. Inside the extended text message, depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. 4. Select a text message. ▷ Display additional information on the Check Control message in the integrated Owner's Handbook. ▷ "Service request" "Check Control" Messages displayed at the end of a journey Special messages displayed when driving are displayed again when the ignition is switched off. Contact the Service Partner. ▷ "BMW Mobile Care" Contact the Mobile Service. Hiding Check Control messages Fuel gauge Vehicle incline can lead to fluctu‐ ations in the display. Notes on refuelling, see page 234. Revolution counter Press the on-board computer button on the turn indicator lever. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played permanently and remain until the fault has been repaired. If there are a number of malfunctions simultaneously, the mes‐ sages are displayed in succession. These messages can be hidden for approx‐ imately eight seconds. They are then dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are auto‐ matically hidden after approximately 20 sec‐ onds. They remain saved and can be dis‐ played again. Displaying Check Control messages saved in memory It is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red warning zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is interrup‐ ted to protect the engine. Coolant temperature If the coolant and therefore the engine become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Check coolant level, see page 251. Odometer and trip distance recorder ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Trip distance recorder, ar‐ row 2. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Reset trip distance recorder Controls Range Press the button. Once the reserve level is reached: ▷ When the ignition is off, the odometer is displayed. ▷ A Check Control message is briefly displayed. ▷ When the ignition is on, the trip distance recorder is re‐ set. ▷ The on-board computer shows the remaining range. Outside temperature Outside temperature warning If the display falls to +3 ℃/+37 ℉, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is dis‐ played. There is an increased risk of black ice. ▷ With, for instance, fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured. If the range drops below approx. 50 km, 30 miles the Check Control message is continually dis‐ played. Refuel in good time If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, you should refuel as soon as possible, or engine function may be impaired and damage may oc‐ cur.◀ Displaying the range Danger of icy roads Even at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉, there can be an increased danger of icy roads. To reduce the risk of an accident, you should al‐ ways drive carefully in potentially icy areas, for example bridges and shaded roads.◀ 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" Time The time is shown in the instru‐ ment cluster. Setting the time on the control display, see page 80. Current fuel consumption Date The date is displayed on the in‐ strument cluster. Setting the date on the control display, see page 80. Shows the momentary fuel con‐ sumption. It is possible to check the economy and environmental compatibility of your driving style. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 73 Controls Displays Displaying the current fuel consumption due date to the Service centre, Automatic Serv‐ ice Notification, see page 222. 1. "Settings" Display in the instrument cluster. 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" Instrument cluster with extended functionality Display in the instrument cluster with extended functionality. The bar gauge for the current fuel consumption is shown in the instrument cluster. Energy recuperation In the coasting mode, the kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electrical energy. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be low‐ ered. Detailed information on service requirements More detailed information on the scope of main‐ tenance can be displayed on the control display. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Essential maintenance routines and any statutory inspections required are dis‐ played. Service requirements 4. Select an entry to display more detailed in‐ formation. Principle Symbols The distance to be driven or time to the next maintenance is displayed briefly after switching on the ignition. The current service requirements can be read by the service advisor from the remote control. Symbols Description No servicing is currently nee‐ ded. Display Servicing or an inspection re‐ quired by law is due soon. Instrument cluster Servicing is overdue. The data regarding the service status of your vehicle or regarding legally prescribed inspec‐ tions are transferred automatically before the 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Entering deadlines Controls Maintenance visits carried out are shown. Enter deadlines for prescribed statutory inspec‐ tions. 5. Select an entry to display more detailed in‐ formation. Ensure that the date and time of the vehicle are set correctly. Symbols 1. "Vehicle information" Symbols Description 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Green: maintenance has been car‐ ried out on time. "Service required" 4. "§ vehicle inspection" Yellow: maintenance has been car‐ ried out with a delay. 5. "Date:" 6. Make the settings. 7. Confirm. Maintenance has not been carried out. The date input is saved. Automatic Service notification Data on the service status or on statutory in‐ spections for the vehicle are transmitted to the Service centre automatically when a service or inspection is imminent. Shift point indicator Principle It can be checked when the Service centre was notified. The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation. 1. "Vehicle information" Displays 2. "Vehicle status" Instructions on up or downshifting are displayed on the instrument cluster. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Last Teleservice Call" Symbols Description Service history Most efficient gear is engaged. Have maintenance work carried out by the Serv‐ ice centre and entered in the vehicle data. The entries are, just like a service booklet, evidence of regular maintenance. Shift up into most efficient gear. The maintenance visits entered can be shown on the control display. Operation is available as soon as a maintenance visit has been entered in the vehicle data. Shift down into most efficient gear. Shift to neutral. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. 4. "Service required" "Service history" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 75 Controls Displays Speed Limit Information with No Passing Information Display Principle Speed Limit Information Speed Limit Information displays using a sym‐ bol in the shape of a traffic sign in the instrument cluster, the currently detected speed limit. The camera in the base of the rear view mirror re‐ cords the traffic signs on the verge as well as variable displays on overhead gantries. Traffic signs with additional symbols, for example, when wet, are also compared with data internal to the vehicle, for example the rain sensor, and displayed, depending on the situation. The sys‐ tem considers the information stored in the nav‐ igation system and also displays the speed lim‐ its present on unmarked sections of road. No Passing Information No Passing Information displays with corre‐ sponding symbols in the instrument cluster no passing restrictions and their removal detected by the camera. The system only considers no passing restrictions and lifting the restriction made known by signage. No display: ▷ In countries in which no passing is primarily shown by road markings. ▷ On routes without signage. ▷ On level crossings, carriageway markings or other situations which would not indicate an unsigned no passing restriction. Switching on/off The following information appears in the instru‐ ment cluster. Speed Limit Information ▷ Present speed limit. ▷ Speed limit cancelled - for German motorways. ▷ Speed limit information un‐ available. No Passing Information ▷ No passing restriction. ▷ End of no passing restriction. ▷ No Passing Information un‐ available. System limits Personal assessment The system is no substitute for your per‐ sonal assessment of the traffic situation. The system supports the driver and does not replace the human eye.◀ The function may be disabled or inaccurate un‐ der certain conditions, for example: ▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow. ▷ If road signs are obscured. ▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐ hicle ahead. ▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Speed limit information" If Speed Limit Information is switched on, this can be displayed through the on-board com‐ puter to the information display in the instru‐ 76 ment cluster. No Passing Information is dis‐ played together with activated Speed Limit Info. ▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, stickers, labels, etc. ▷ Due to possible wrong detections of the camera. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are wrong. Display ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. Instrument cluster Controls ▷ If there are deviations in relation to the nav‐ igation, for example due to changes in the road routing. ▷ On overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers. ▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the standard. ▷ During the calibration process of the camera immediately after the vehicle is supplied. Camera The camera is in the area of the base of the mir‐ ror. Instrument cluster with extended functionality Activating the list and entering a setting Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the area in front of the rear view mirror. Selection lists in the instrument cluster Principle The following can be displayed or operated via the buttons and the knurled wheel on the steer‐ ing wheel using the display in the instrument cluster: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Programs of the drive experience switch. Turn the knurled wheel on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the knurled wheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm by pressing the knurled wheel. ▷ Repeat dialling for telephone. ▷ Activating the voice control system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 77 Controls Displays On-board computer Setting displays for the information display Calling up information on the information display It can be set which displays of the on-board computer can be called up on the information display in the instrument cluster. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. Select the desired displays. Press the on-board computer button on the turn indicator lever. Information is displayed on the information dis‐ play in the instrument cluster. Overview of the information Detailed information Info display Range Repeated pressing of the button on the turn indicator lever shows the following information on the information display: ▷ Range. Displays the estimated range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 30 km, 20 miles. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Average fuel consumption ▷ Average fuel consumption. Calculated for the period since the engine was last started. ▷ Current consumption. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. The average fuel consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances. Average speed ▷ Time of arrival. With activated route guidance in the naviga‐ tion system. ▷ Distance to destination With activated route guidance in the naviga‐ tion system. ▷ Arrow display of the navigation system. The calculation of average speed ignores any stationary periods where the engine was switched off manually. Resetting average values Keep the on-board computer button pressed on the turn indicator lever. With activated route guidance in the naviga‐ tion system. 78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Controls Distance to destination Activating/deactivating the speed limit The remaining distance to the destination is dis‐ played if a destination was entered in the navi‐ gation system before starting the journey. 1. "Settings" The distance to the destination is automatically adopted. 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller. Saving actual speed as limit value Arrival time The provisional arrival time is dis‐ played if a destination was en‐ tered in the navigation system before starting the journey. A precondition is that the time is correctly set. 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller. The current driving speed is saved as the limit. Speed Limit Information Journey computer Description of speed limit information, see page 76 Two types of on-board computer are available. Speed limit ▷ "Journey computer": values deliver an over‐ view of the current trip. Display of a speed limit where a warning is to be issued when reached. Repeat warning if the set speed limit was un‐ dershot once by at least 5 km/h, 3 mph. Displaying, setting or altering limit 1. "Settings" ▷ "On-board computer": values can be reset any number of times. Resetting the journey computer 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Journey computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Reset automatically": all values are reset if the vehicle is at a standstill for approximately four hours. 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed. 5. Press the controller. The speed limit is saved. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 79 Controls Displays Display on the control display 3. "Time zone" Display the on-board computer or journey com‐ puter on the control display. 4. Select desired time zone. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "On-board computer" or "Journey computer" The time zone is saved. Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" Resetting fuel consumption and speed 3. "Time:" 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "On-board computer" 3. "Cons." or "Speed" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed. 4. "Yes" Sport displays In the control display the current values for power and torque are shown. Display sport displays in the control display 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Sport displays" 7. Press the controller. The time is saved. Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is saved. Settings on the control display Date Time 1. "Settings" Setting the time zone 3. "Date:" 1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 2. "Time/Date" 80 Setting the date 2. "Time/Date" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Displays Controls 5. Press the controller. Setting the speech dialogue 6. Make the setting for month and year accord‐ ingly. Voice dialogue for the voice entry system, see page 22. The date is saved. Units of measure Setting the date format 1. "Settings" Setting the units of measure To set the units of measure for fuel consump‐ tion, distance covered/remaining range, and temperature: 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item. The date format is saved. Language 4. Select the desired unit. Setting the language To set the language on the control display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Brightness Adjusting brightness 3. "Language:" Adjusting brightness of control display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 4. Select the desired language. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 81 Controls Displays 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is obtained. 5. Press the controller. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Depending on the lighting conditions, bright‐ ness control might not be immediately recog‐ nisable. 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Lights Controls Lights Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Overview If the driver's door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lights are automatically switched off with these switch settings. Side lights Switch position : the vehicle is illuminated all around, for example when parking. You should not leave the side lights on for longer periods of time, since the battery could dis‐ charge and you might not have enough power to start the engine. To park, it is better to switch on the one-sided parking light, see page 84. Low-beam headlights Switch position with the ignition switched on: low-beam headlights are illuminated. Welcome lights On parking the vehicle, leave the switch in posi‐ tion or : the side lights and interior light illuminate briefly when unlocking the vehicle. 1 Rear fog lights 2 Front fog lights 3 Automatic driving lights control/Adaptive Headlights/high-beam assistance/welcome light/daytime driving lights 1. "Settings" 4 Lights off/daytime driving lights 2. "Lights" 5 Side lights 3. "Welcome light" 6 Low-beam headlights / welcome light / highbeam assistance 7 Headlight beam throw adjustment 8 Instrument lighting Side lights/low-beam headlights, driving lights control General Switch setting: 0, Activating/deactivating The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. , Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 83 Controls Lights Headlight courtesy delay feature Daytime driving lights If the headlight flasher is activated after switch‐ ing off the ignition, the low-beam headlights il‐ luminate and remain on for a certain time. The daytime driving lights come on in switch . position 0 or Setting the duration Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" 2. "Lights" 3. "Daytime driving lights" 3. "Home lights: s" 4. Set the duration. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Parking lights Automatic driving lights control Switch position : depending on ambient light conditions, the system switches the low-beam headlights off and on automatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight and in rain or snow. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illumi‐ nated. The headlights may also come on when the sun is sitting low in a blue sky. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. The low-beam headlights always remain on when the fog lights are switched on. Switch on Personal responsibility The driving lights control function is no substitute for your individual judgement of when it is necessary to switch on the lights. The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog‐ nise fog or hazy weather. In such situations, switch on the lights manually to avoid any safety risk.◀ 84 With the ignition switched off, push the lever upwards or downwards beyond the resistance point for approximately 2 seconds. Switching off Press the lever briefly in the opposite direction as far as the resistance point. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Lights Adaptive Headlights Principle Adaptive Headlights is a variable headlight con‐ trol system that makes it possible to illuminate the road surface responsively. The beams from the headlights follow the road ahead on the basis of the steering angle and other parameters. In sharp turns up to a specified speed, for ex‐ ample in hairpin bends or when cornering, either the fog lights or the cornering light switches on. The lights up the inside of the curves better. Depending on the speed, the variable light dis‐ tribution ensures even better illumination of the roadway. The light distribution is automatically adapted to the speed. The city light is active as of a speed of less than 50 km/h, 30 mph. The motorway light is switched on at a speed higher than 110 km/h, 68 mph after approximately 30 sec‐ onds or as of a speed of 140 km/h, 87 mph. Activating Switch position on. with the ignition switched A cornering light is activated automatically de‐ pending on the steering angle or use of the turn indicators. Controls Headlight beam throw adjustment With halogen headlights adjust the beam throw of the low-beam headlights manually in accord‐ ance with the vehicle load. Otherwise, the glare will disturb drivers of oncoming vehicles. Values applicable when towing a trailer: 0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage. 1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage. 1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage. 2 / 2 = 1 person, boot fully loaded. High-beam assistance Principle When low-beam headlights are switched on, this system automatically switches the highbeam headlights on and off or fades out the areas which dazzle oncoming vehicles. This process is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior mirror. The assistant ensures that the high-beam headlights are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. You can also control the lights yourself at any time and switch them on and off as usual. Activating So as not to dazzle oncoming vehicles, the adap‐ tive cornering light does not swivel to the driver's side when stationary. When reversing, only the cornering light is active and illuminates the zone on the outside of the bend. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive Headlights are faulty or have failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible. The high beam assistance can be activated with the low-beam headlights switched on. 1. Turn the light switch to position or . 2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever, arrow. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 85 Controls Lights The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated. When the low-beam headlights are on, the beam is dipped and returned to full beam automati‐ cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐ equate illumination, for example in built-up areas. The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates if the high beam is switched on by the system. Depending on the version of the system installed in the ve‐ hicle, it may be that the high beam is not switched off for oncoming vehicles, but only the areas which dazzle the oncoming vehicles are faded out. In this case, the blue indicator light continues to illuminate. Raising and dipping manually System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistance cannot replace the personal decision to use the high beam. In such situations you should dip the headlights manually in order not to create a safety hazard.◀ In the following situations, the system will not operate or its operation will be impaired and your intervention may be required: ▷ During extremely unfavourable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipita‐ tion. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists or horseback riders or carts, and when trains or ships are close to the road, or when game are passing across the road. ▷ On narrow bends, steep uphill or downhill gradients, at traffic junctions or if your view of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is ob‐ structed. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and where there are very reflective signs. ▷ At low road speeds. ▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, stickers, labels, etc. ▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1. Camera ▷ High-beam headlights off / headlight flasher, arrow 2. The high beam assistance can be deactivated by manually raising and dipping. To reactivate high-beam assistance, press the button on the turn indicator lever. The camera is in the area of the base of the mir‐ ror. Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the area in front of the rear view mirror. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Lights Fog lights Controls Xenon headlight Front fog lights The side lights or low-beam headlights must be switched on. Press the button. The green indicator light is illuminated. If automatic driving lights control, see page 84, has been activated, the low-beam headlights il‐ luminate automatically when the front fog lights are switched on. Guiding fog lights , a guide fog light for a In switch position wider illumination is also activated up to a speed of 110 km/h, 68 mph. Measures to prevent the headlights from daz‐ zling oncoming vehicles are necessary if you take the vehicle into countries in which the op‐ posite rule of the road applies. BMW recom‐ mends that the work be performed by the Serv‐ ice centre if you are not familiar with the procedure. Once they have been adjusted the headlights will not dazzle oncoming vehicles when you drive on the normal side of the road, so you can have the adjustments carried out, for example, before entering the country in which the opposite rule of the road applies. Adjust headlights 1. In the wheel arches, remove both brackets and the cover. Rear fog lights The low-beam headlights or front fog lights must be switched on. Press the button. The yellow indicator light is illuminated. If automatic driving lights control, see page 84, has been activated, the low-beam headlights come on automatically when the front fog lights are switched on. 2. Turn the cover and remove. Left-hand/right-hand traffic Halogen headlights Measures to prevent the headlights from daz‐ zling oncoming vehicles are necessary if you take the vehicle into countries in which the op‐ posite rule of the road applies. Your Service cen‐ tre can provide the appropriate light benders that can be affixed to the headlight lenses. Pro‐ ceed in accordance with the enclosed instruc‐ tions when affixing the light benders to the head‐ lights. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 87 Controls Lights 3. Push the lever upwards. Switching the interior light on and off manually Press the button. To switch off permanently: press the button for approximately three seconds. Switch on again: press button. Reading lights Press the button. Instrument lighting There are reading lights located at the front and in the rear beside the interior lights. Adjusting With the interior light switched off, the reading lights cannot be switched on. You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the side lights or the low-beam headlights are switched on. The lighting intensity can be set using the knurled wheel. Ambient lighting Depending on the equipment, the lighting in the interior can be set individually for a few lights. Select colour scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" Interior light 3. "Ambient:" General The interior light, the footwell lights, door entry lighting and the courtesy lighting are controlled automatically. The brightness of some equipment is influenced by the knurled wheel for the instrument lighting. 4. Select the desired setting. If the colour scheme of the line is selected and the welcome light is activated, the welcome light is coloured when released. 1 Interior light 2 Reading light 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Lights Controls Adjusting brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be set over the knurled wheel for the instrument light‐ ing but also independently of it. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjusting brightness. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 89 Controls Security Security Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 3 Head airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Side airbag Front airbags Head airbags Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ senger in the event of a head-on collision where the action of the seat belts alone would be in‐ sufficient. The head airbag supports the head in the event of a side-on collision. Side airbags In a side-on crash, the side airbag supports the body from the side in the chest and pelvic area. 90 Protective effect Airbags are not activated by every collision, for example not in more minor accidents and rearend collisions. Information for optimal protective effect of the airbags Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Security ▷ Keep your distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered. ▷ No other persons, pets or objects should be held or permitted to remain between the air‐ bag and yourself. ▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the front passenger's side as a tray. ▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen in the area of the passenger's side free, i.e. do not attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit brackets, for example for navigation devices or mobile phones. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger adopts a correct seated position, i.e. leaves his or her feet in the footwell and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument cluster, otherwise he/she could sustain leg injuries in the event of the front airbag being triggered. ▷ Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other ob‐ jects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. ▷ Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. ▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean against the head airbag. Otherwise they could be injured should the airbags deploy. ▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system. ▷ Do not dismantle the steering wheel. ▷ Never attach any material to the airbag cov‐ ers with adhesive; never place material over them or modify them in any way. ▷ Do not modify individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the covers on the steering wheel, instrument cluster, seats and roof posts as well as the sides of the roof lining.◀ Even if all these instructions are complied with, depending on the circumstances in which an Controls accident occurs, certain injuries as a result of contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out. The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐ bag may lead to brief and generally temporary hearing loss in vehicle occupants sensitive to noise. In the event of faults, taking the airbags out of use and after they have been triggered Avoid touching the system’s components im‐ mediately after it has been triggered, as there is a risk of sustaining burns. Only commission your Service Centre or au‐ thorised workshops with checking, repairing or dismantling and scrapping airbag generators, as your Service Centre or authorised workshops have the required legal permits for handling ex‐ plosives. Any careless or unskilled interference with the system could lead to its failure or to accidental triggering with the risk of injury.◀ Functional readiness of the airbag system When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster briefly illuminates and so shows the functional readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. Airbag system disrupted ▷ Warning light does not illuminate after the ignition is switched on. ▷ Warning light is permanently illuminated. Immediately check airbag system when there is a fault Immediately check airbag system when there is a fault, otherwise you run the risk that the system does not function as expected in an accident in spite of corresponding seriousness of the acci‐ dent.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 91 Controls Security Not for Australia/New Zealand: Key switch for front passenger airbags General Activating the front passenger airbags Insert the key and press inwards where necessary. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to the ON position as far as it will go. Once the stop position has been reached, remove the key. Key switch in end position Make sure that the key switch is in the cor‐ responding end position. Otherwise the airbags are not activated/deactivated.◀ The front and side airbags for the front passen‐ ger can be deactivated and reactivated using the integrated key from the remote control. Deactivating the front passenger airbags The front passenger airbags are reactivated and can deploy correctly if the need arises. Indicator light for front passenger airbags Insert the key and press inwards where necessary. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to the OFF position as far as it will go. Once the stop posi‐ tion has been reached, remove the key. The front passenger airbags are deactivated. The driver's airbags remain active. Key switch in end position Make sure that the key switch is in the cor‐ responding end position. Otherwise the airbags are not activated/deactivated.◀ The indicator light for the front passenger air‐ bags shows the operating status of the front passenger airbags. After switching on the ignition, the light indi‐ cates whether the airbags are activated or de‐ activated. If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in the front passenger's seat, reactivate the front pas‐ senger airbags so that they are triggered as in‐ tended in the event of an accident. ▷ When front passenger air‐ bags are deactivated, the in‐ dicator light remains illumina‐ ted. The airbag condition is displayed on the check lamp on the headlining, see page 92. ▷ When front passenger air‐ bags are activated, the indi‐ cator light is not illuminated. 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Security Controls Runflat indicator RPA Status display Principle The current status of the runflat indicator can be shown on the control display, for example whether the runflat indicator is active. The system does not measure the tyre pres‐ sures as such. It detects a pressure loss on the basis of a com‐ parison between the speeds at which the indi‐ vidual wheels rotate while the vehicle is in mo‐ tion. If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes. This in turn alters the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel. This is detected and re‐ ported as a flat tyre. Operating requirements The system must have been initialised with cor‐ rect tyre inflation pressure, otherwise reliable signalling of a flat tyre cannot be assured. Each time the tyre pressure is adjusted or a tyre or wheel is changed, initialise the system again. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. The status is displayed. Initialising On initialisation, the current tyre pressures are stored as a reference for detection of a flat tyre. The initialisation is started by confirming the correct inflation pressures. When driving with snow chains fitted, do not in‐ itialise the system. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. System limits "Flat Tyre Monitor" "Confirm tyre pressure" 4. Start the engine – do not drive off. Sudden tyre damage No warning can be given of extreme, sud‐ den tyre failure caused by external factors.◀ A natural, even loss of pressure in all four tyres that occurs over time is not detected. Conse‐ quently, check the tyre pressures at regular in‐ tervals. In the following situations, the system could be slow to respond or operate incorrectly: ▷ If the system has not been initialised. ▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery surfaces. ▷ When driving enthusiastically, causing the driven wheels to spin, high lateral accelera‐ tion. ▷ Driving with snow chains. 5. Start the initialisation with "Initialise tyre pressure". 6. Drive off. Initialising is completed while the vehicle is in motion; this process can be interrupted at any time. Initialising resumes automatically when you continue your journey. Indication of a flat tyre The yellow warning light is illuminated. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre pressure. 1. Reduce your speed and cautiously stop the car. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres. 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with standard tyres or run-flat tyres. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 93 Controls Security The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see page 241, is the circle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. Do not continue a journey without run-flat tyres Do not continue your journey if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tyres, otherwise a serious accident could occur.◀ It is possible that Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated as soon as the message for a punc‐ ture appears. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph any longer. 3. As soon as you get an opportunity, check the tyre pressure in all four tyres. If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the runflat indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system. Maximum possible distance with tyres entirely deflated: What to do in the event of a flat tyre The possible distance with a flat tyre depends on the load and strain on the vehicle during the journey. Standard tyres With a moderate vehicle load, the possible dis‐ tance travelled is approx. 80 km, 50 miles. 1. Identify the damaged tyre. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tyres. The tyre inflation pressure display of the Mobility System, see page 242, can be used for this. If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the runflat indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system. If it is not possible to identify, contact a Serv‐ ice centre. 2. The tyre inflation pressure display of the Mobility System, see page 242, can be used for this. When driving with damaged tyres, the vehicle handling changes, for example quicker loss of traction when braking, longer stopping distance and modified self-steering behaviour. Adapt driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering or driving over obstacles, for example curbs, potholes etc. As the possible distance largely depends on the strain on the vehicle during the journey, this can be shorter, or longer if the vehicle is driven care‐ fully, according to speed, road condition, out‐ side temperature, load etc. Continuing a journey with a flat tyre Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. If tyre pressure has fallen, vehicle handling changes, for example reduced directional sta‐ bility when braking, longer stopping distance and modified self-steering behaviour.◀ Run-flat tyres Maximum speed If a tyre has punctured you can continue your journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of 80 km/h, 50 mph. Continuing a journey with a flat tyre If you continue a journey with a flat tyre: Continuing a journey with a flat tyre and trailer When a trailer is being towed, heavy trailers in particular can start to snake. For this reason, do not exceed 60 km/h, 35 mph, as otherwise there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀ 1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres. 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Security Final tyre failure Controls Display Vibration or loud noises while driving may be an indication that the tyre has finally failed. Reduce your speed and stop, otherwise sec‐ tions of the tyre could become detached and cause an accident. Do not drive the car any fur‐ ther; contact your Service Centre instead.◀ Lane departure warning ▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. Principle This system warns if the vehicle leaves the lane, when the vehicle is on roads with lane markings and travelling above a given speed. Depending on the equipment for your country, this speed is between 55 km/h, approximately 35 mph and 70 km/h, approximately 45 mph. When this sys‐ tem is switched on below this speed, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane boundary line has been detected and warnings can be issued. Output of the warning If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a lane boundary line is detected, the steering wheel starts to vibrate. When there are warnings, the steering wheel starts to vibrate slightly. The time of this warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. If the turn indicator is set before changing lanes, no warning is issued. The system does not issue a warning if the driver indicates before leaving the driving lane. The warning is cancelled: Switching on/off Cancellation of the warning ▷ Automatically after approximately three seconds. ▷ On returning to the correct lane. ▷ With strong braking. ▷ On indicating. System limits Personal responsibility The system is no substitute for your per‐ sonal assessment of the road ahead and the traffic situation. Press the button. ▷ On: LED is illuminated. ▷ Off: LED turns off. The status is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. If a warning is issued, do not move the steering wheel in an unnecessarily violent manner, as otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle.◀ The function can be restricted, for example in the following situations: ▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 95 Controls Security ▷ With worn, poorly visible, merging/separat‐ ing or ambiguous boundary lines, for exam‐ ple in areas where there are road works. Exceeding the speed limit ▷ If boundary lines are covered by snow, ice, dirt or water. The system warns if the travelling speed ex‐ ceeds the set speed limit. In particular situations the speed limit can be deliberately exceeded by accelerating. ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. ▷ If the boundary lines are not white. No brake intervention ▷ If boundary lines are obscured. If the set speed limit has been reached or unin‐ tentionally exceeded (for example driving down‐ hill) there is no brake intervention. ▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐ hicle ahead. ▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic. ▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, stickers, labels, etc. If you set a speed limit whilst driving which is below the current speed, the vehicle rolls until driving speed drops below the speed limit. Controls ▷ During the calibration process of the camera immediately after the vehicle is supplied. Camera The camera is in the area of the base of the mir‐ ror. Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the area in front of the rear view mirror. Speed limit, adjustable 1 System on/off 2 Change speed limit Switch on Press the button. The current speed is assumed as the speed limit. When switching on when stationary 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit. Principle The speedometer marker is set to the corre‐ sponding speed. With the system, the speed can be restricted from a value of 30 km/h/20 mph. There are no restrictions below the set speed limit. When activating the speed limit it is possible that Dynamic Stability Control, DSC is activated and the mode is changed to COMFORT. 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Security Switch off Controls Warning Press the button. For example, the system is also deactivated: ▷ When engaging reverse gear. ▷ When switching the engine off. Visual warning The indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes if the set speed limit is exceeded for as long as you exceed the set speed limit. ▷ When switching on Cruise Control. The indicators extinguish. Change speed limit Acoustic warning ▷ If you unintentionally exceed the set speed limit, you will hear an acoustic warning after approximately five seconds. ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the current speed while the vehicle is in motion, the warning sounds after approximately 30 seconds. ▷ If you intentionally exceed the limit by fully depressing the accelerator, no warning is given. Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or downwards until the desired speed limit is set. Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Every time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit is in‐ creased or decreased by approximately 1 km/h, approx. 1 mph. Marking of the speed limit ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ yond the resistance point, the desired speed limit is increased or decreased to the next multiple of 10 km/h on the speedometer dis‐ play. If you set a speed limit whilst driving which is below the current speed, the vehicle rolls until driving speed drops below the speed limit. Exceeding the speed limit You may intentionally exceed the speed limit. There is no acoustic warning in such a case. To intentionally exceed the set speed limit, com‐ pletely depress the accelerator. Display in the speedometer: ▷ Marker illuminates green: the system is active. ▷ Marker does not illuminate: the system is inactive. Indicator light ▷ If indicator light is illuminated: the system is switched on. ▷ If indicator light is flashing: set speed is exceeded. Brief status display Set speed limit briefly appears. If the speed drops below the set speed limit, it is automatically reactivated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 97 Controls Driving stability control systems Driving stability control systems Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Anti-lock Brake System, ABS ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied. Steering control is retained even in the event of full braking, enhancing active road safety. ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is started. ual wheels, helping, within the limits imposed by the laws of physics, to keep the car safely on course. Adapting driving style to the prevailing conditions It is therefore the driver’s responsibility to adopt a suitable driving style in every situation. Not even DSC can overcome the laws of phys‐ ics. Do not limit the additional safety afforded by this system by taking driving risks.◀ Indicator and warning lights If indicator light is flashing: DSC is reg‐ ulating the acceleration and braking forces. If indicator light is illuminated: DSC has failed. Brake assist When the brake is pressed quickly, this system automatically applies maximum braking power assistance. With full braking, this keeps the braking distance as short as possible. It also makes full use of the advantages offered by ABS. Maintain pressure on the brake during the entire brake application. Dynamic Stability Control, DSC Deactivate DSC: DSC OFF Driving stability during acceleration and corner‐ ing is restricted if DSC is deactivated. To support the driving stability, activate DSC as soon as possible. Deactivate DSC Press and hold down the button – but for no longer than approx. 10 seconds – until the DSC OFF indicator light in the instru‐ ment cluster is illuminated and DSC OFF is dis‐ played. The DSC system is switched off. Principle DSC prevents the driven wheels losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. Activate DSC DSC is also able to detect unstable driving con‐ ditions such as loss of traction at the rear or ve‐ hicle slip over the front wheels. DSC reduces engine output and applies the brakes at individ‐ The DSC OFF and DSC OFF indicator lights are not illuminated. 98 Press the button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving stability control systems Indicator and warning lights DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster when DSC is deactivated. If indicator light is illuminated: DSC is deactivated. Dynamic Traction Control, DTC Principle The DTC system is a variant of the DSC opti‐ mised for forward momentum. In particular road conditions, for example roads on which snow has not been cleared, the system ensures maximum forward momentum but limi‐ ted driving stability. Controls Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light are not illuminated. Variable sports steering The variable sports steering amplifies the steer‐ ing angle of the front wheels when the steering wheel is fully turned, for example in tight bends or when parking. The steering becomes more direct. It also varies the force required when steering, depending on the speed. This enables a sports-oriented steering re‐ sponse. In addition, steering is made easier dur‐ ing parking and manoeuvring. Therefore, drive with the appropriate caution. In the following exceptional situations it may be best to activate DTC for a short time: Drive experience switch ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. Principle ▷ If the car has to be rocked out of or started in deep snow or on a loose surface. ▷ Driving with snow chains. Deactivating/activating Dynamic Traction Control, DTC With activated Dynamic Traction Control, DTC you have maximum traction on loose surfaces. Driving stability is limited on accelerating and cornering. With the drive experience switch, certain prop‐ erties of the vehicle can be adjusted. Various programs can be selected for this. Using the drive experience button and using the DSC OFF button, one program can be activated in each case. Operation of the programs Press the button Program DSC OFF TRACTION Activating DTC Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT ECO PRO 99 Controls Driving stability control systems Automatic program change SPORT In the following situations, there is an automatic switch to COMFORT: Sporty driving with optimised chassis with max‐ imum driving stability. ▷ Failure of the Dynamic Stability Control DSC. The program can be configured individually. The configuration is saved for the remote control currently in use. ▷ In the event of a flat tyre. ▷ Activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode. DSC OFF When you select DSC OFF, see page 98, driving stability during acceleration and cornering is re‐ stricted. TRACTION With TRACTION you have maximum traction on loose surfaces. Dynamic, see page 99, Traction Control, DTC, is activated. Driving stability is limited on accelerating and cornering. Activating SPORT Press button until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring SPORT If the display is activated on the control display, see page 101, the Sport program can be set to individual requirements. ▷ Activating the Sport program. ▷ "Configure SPORT" ▷ Configure the program. SPORT+ The Sport program can also be configured be‐ fore it is activated: Sporty driving with optimised chassis with re‐ stricted driving stability. 1. "Settings" Driver assumes part of the task of stabilising the vehicle. 2. "SPORT mode" Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu‐ minated. Automatic program change When activating the cruise control, the SPORT mode is automatically selected. Indicator and warning lights SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. DSC OFF indicator light illuminates. 100 3. Configure the program. This configuration is called up when the Sport program is activated. COMFORT For a balanced configuration with maximum driving stability. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving stability control systems Activate COMFORT Controls Selected program Press button until COMFORT is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The selected program is shown in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, there is an automatic switch into the COMFORT program, automatic pro‐ gram change, see page 100. Display on the control display ECO PRO ECO PRO, see page 143, provides consistent fuel consumption-reducing adjustment for max‐ imum range at maximum driving stability. Comfort functions and the engine control can be adjusted. Program changes can be displayed on the con‐ trol display. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" The program can be configured individually. Activate ECO PRO Press the button until ECO PRO is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Configure ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 3. "Driving mode info" 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings. Drive-off assistant Displays The system provides support when driving off on upward inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this. Program selection On pushing the button, a list of programs that can be selected is displayed. 1. Hold the car in place by pressing the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 101 Controls Driving stability control systems The car is held for approximately 2 seconds after the foot brake has been released. Depending on the vehicle’s load or when towing a trailer, the vehicle may roll backwards a little. Drive off immediately After releasing the foot brake, move off swiftly, as the starting assistance will no longer hold the car after approximately 2 seconds and it will start to roll back.◀ 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort Controls Driving comfort Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Acute warning Warning in the event of an immediate collision if the vehicle approaches another vehicle with rel‐ atively high differential speed. Switching the warning function on/off Forward alert Principle The system warns as of approximately 15 km/h, 10 mph in two stages that there might be a dan‐ ger of collision. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Press the button. ▷ On: LED is illuminated. ▷ Off: LED turns off. The status is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Configure warning time This considers vehicles in a similar direction of movement if they are in the detection range of the system. When deliberately approaching a vehicle, the collision warning is activated later to avoid dis‐ ruptive warnings. After the warning function is switched on, the warning time can be set using iDrive. The selected warning time is saved for the re‐ mote control currently in use. Display in the instrument cluster The forward alert can be output in the instru‐ ment cluster and acoustically. Warning levels Advance warning Warning, for example if a danger of collision is anticipated or there is a very short distance to a vehicle ahead. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 103 Controls Driving comfort Restrictions of the function Warning levels The function can be restricted, for example in the following situations: Symbol Measure Vehicle illuminates red: advance warning ▷ In thick fog, rain, spray or snowfall. Increase distance ▷ If the field of view of the camera and/or the windscreen is dirty or covered. Vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning System indicates that you must brake and/or manoeuvre the vehicle yourself. Adapting speed and driving style The display does not release you from your responsibility to adapt your speed and driv‐ ing style to prevailing driving conditions.◀ ▷ On sharp bends. ▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic. ▷ For vehicles without sufficiently visible rear lights. ▷ For partially covered vehicles. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine using the start/stop button. ▷ During the calibration process of the camera immediately after the vehicle is supplied. Sensitivity of the advance warning System limits Your own attentiveness System limitations mean that it can occur that warnings are not issued, are issued too late, or are issued incorrectly. This means that you must pay full attention so that you are able to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise there is the risk of an accident.◀ After every adjustment of the advance warning time, false warnings can increasingly occur. Camera Detection range The detection capabilities of the camera and the forward alert are limited. This is why it can occur that no warnings are is‐ sued or they are issued late. The camera is in the area of the base of the mir‐ ror. It is possible that the following are not detected: Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the area in front of the rear view mirror. ▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching at high speed. ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating heavily. ▷ Vehicles with unusual rear view. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. Cruise Control Principle The system is operational as of approximately 30 km/h, 20 mph. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort The speed set using the control elements on the steering wheel is maintained. On downhill gradients, the system will brake the car if the braking action of the engine alone is insufficient. Unfavourable conditions Do not use the system if unfavourable conditions do not permit driving at constant speed, for example: ▷ On stretches with a great many corners and bends. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog, snow, rain or a loose road surface. Otherwise you could lose control of the car and cause an accident as a result.◀ Controls Controls Switch off Disabled or interrupted system When the system is disabled or interrup‐ ted, intervene actively by braking and manoeu‐ vring the vehicle yourself, as otherwise there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀ Press the button. ▷ When activated: press twice. ▷ When interrupted: press once. The indicators extinguish. The saved desired speed is deleted. Interrupting When the system is activated, press the button. The system interrupts automatically if: ▷ The brake is applied. Overview ▷ The clutch is applied. ▷ The transmission is moved from position D. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control, DTC is activated or DSC is disabled. ▷ DSC intervenes. Maintaining and saving the current speed 1 Set speed 2 Resume speed 3 Change speed Switch on Press the button on the steering wheel. The speedometer marker is set to the current speed. Cruise Control can be used. During the interruption, press the rocker switch. With the system switched on, the driven speed is maintained and saved as the desired speed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 105 Controls Driving comfort It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster, displays in the speed‐ ometer, see page 106. When maintaining or saving the cruise control, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be switched on if required. Changing/maintaining speed By pressing the rocker switch without interrup‐ tion, the current driven speed can also be main‐ tained and saved. Pressing beyond the resistance point re‐ sults in greater vehicle acceleration. Calling up the desired speed Press the button. The saved speed is regained and maintained. Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the traffic con‐ ditions and always be prepared to apply brakes, as otherwise there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀ Depending on the equipment the indi‐ cator light in the instrument cluster shows whether the system is switched on. Desired speed ▷ Marker illuminates green: the system is active. ▷ Marker illuminates orange: the system is interrupted. ▷ Marker does not illuminate: the system is inactive. Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or downwards until the desired speed is set. With the system active, the speed that is then shown is set and will be achieved on a clear road. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed lightly towards the resistance point, the de‐ sired speed is increased or decreased by approximately 1 km/h, 1 mph. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ yond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased or decreased to the next multi‐ ple of 10 km/h on the speedometer display. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch until the resist‐ ance point is reached and holding acceler‐ ates or slows down the vehicle without pressing the accelerator. The speed is main‐ tained after letting go of the rocker switch. 106 Brief status display Selected desired speed. If the symbol appears in the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the condi‐ tions for operation may have not been met. Park Distance Control, PDC Principle In addition to the Park Distance Control, PDC, the rear-view camera, see page 109, can be ac‐ tivated. PDC assists you with parking. Slowly approach‐ ing an object in front of or behind your vehicle is signalled by means of: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort ▷ Audible warning signals. ▷ Visual display. Measurement Ultrasonic sensors in each bumper measure the distance. The range is approximately 2 m, 6 ft. An acoustic warning is only issued: ▷ From the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approximately 60 cm, 24 in. ▷ For the centre rear sensors at approximately 1.50 m, 5 ft. Controls Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind areas before or af‐ ter a continuous audible signal is given. Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable. False alarms Under the following conditions, PDC can issue a warning although there is no obstacle in the detection range: ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ If the sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. ▷ If the sensors are covered with snow. System limits Also monitor the traffic situation PDC is no substitute for your personal as‐ sessment of the traffic situation. Also monitor the traffic situation around the vehicle by ob‐ serving it directly. Otherwise, there is a danger that accidents might occur due to other road users or objects located outside of detection range of the PDC, for example. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.◀ Avoid driving fast with PDC active Avoid approaching an object at speed. ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ In large, rectangular buildings with smooth walls, for example underground car parks. ▷ Due to dense exhaust gas. ▷ Due to other ultrasonic sources, for example sweeping machines, steam-jet cleaners or neon lights. The functional disruption is reported by an alternating continuous tone between the front and rear loudspeakers. As soon as the disruption by other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is fully functional again. Avoid moving off at speed while PDC is not yet active. ▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor‐ rectly seated. Due to physical conditions the system could warn when it is too late.◀ Towing a trailer Limits of the ultrasound measurement The rear sensors are unable to perform any meaningful measurements. They therefore do not switch on. Detection of objects might not be possible if the physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring prin‐ ciple are exceeded, for instance by: ▷ Trailer noses and hitches. ▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Low objects. A Check Control message is displayed. Automatic activation While the engine is running, engage transmis‐ sion position R. ▷ Objects with corners and sharp edges. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 107 Controls Driving comfort Automatic switching off when moving forwards The system switches off when a certain distance or speed is exceeded. Volume control You can set the volume of the PDC sound signal, see page 168. Switch the system back on if necessary. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Switching on/off manually Visual warning When the vehicle is approaching an object it will be shown on the control display. Objects that are further away from the car will appear on the control display before an audible warning signal is given. A display is superimposed as soon as PDC is activated. If the image from the rear-view camera was last selected, this is displayed again. To switch over to PDC: Press the button. ▷ On: LED is illuminated. 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the control display. ▷ Off: LED turns off. 2. Press the controller. Audible warning signals The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. An intermittent sound indicates the position of an object as the car approaches it. For instance, if an object is identified to the rear left of the car, the warning signal sounds from the rear left loudspeaker. Zoom image In the left part of the screen the vehicle is shown enlarged. The shorter the distance to an object becomes, the shorter the intervals become. If the distance to a detected object is less than approximately 25 cm, 10 in, a continuous tone sounds. If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐ hicle, an alternating continuous tone sounds. An intermittent continuous tone is interrupted after approximately three seconds: ▷ If you are driving parallel to a wall. The sound signal is switched off: ▷ Once the vehicle has moved more than ap‐ proximately 10 cm, 4 in away from an object. ▷ Forward gear engaged or transmission po‐ sition D selected: front vehicle area. ▷ Reverse gear engaged or transmission po‐ sition R selected: rear vehicle area. ▷ If gearbox position P is engaged. 108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort Controls Malfunction Automatic activation A Check Control message, see page 70, is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. While the engine is running, engage transmis‐ sion position R. The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐ played if the system was switched on using the iDrive. Automatic switching off when moving forwards The system switches off when a certain distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. The areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shown as shaded on the control display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Switching on/off manually To ensure correct functionality: ▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice. ▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure cleaners for an extended period of time and maintain a distance of at least 30 cm, 12 in. Rear-view camera Principle The rear-view camera offers assistance when reversing into a parking space or manoeuvring. To achieve this, the area behind the vehicle is displayed on the control display. System limits Also monitor the traffic situation Also monitor the traffic situation around the vehicle by observing it directly. Otherwise, there is a danger that accidents might occur due to other road users or objects located outside of the screen area of the rear-view camera, for ex‐ ample.◀ Press the button. ▷ On: LED is illuminated. ▷ Off: LED turns off. PDC is displayed on the control display. Switching on the rear-view camera via iDrive, see page 111. Assistance functions Operating requirements ▷ The rear-view camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is completely closed. Detection of objects Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable by the rear-view cam‐ era.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 109 Controls Driving comfort Driving lane lines Parking with the help of driving lane and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines are on the limit of the parking space. ▷ These can appear in the image from the rear-view camera in transmission position R. ▷ They help to estimate the required space when parking and manoeuvring on a level road surface. ▷ They are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to steering wheel movements. 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the driving lane line covers the corresponding turning circle line. Displaying parking assistance lines, see page 111. Turning circle lines Obstacle marking ▷ They can appear in the image from the rearview camera. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning circle on a level road surface. ▷ When the steering wheel is fully turned, only a turning circle line is displayed. ▷ Spaced markings can appear in the image from the rear-view camera. Displaying parking assistance lines, see page 111. Its colour incrementation corresponds to the markings of PDC. It is easier to estimate the dis‐ tance to the displayed object. 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort Zoom to trailer tow hitch To facilitate connecting up a trailer, the picture area around the trailer tow hitch can be zoomed. Controls Display on the control display Switching on the rear-view camera via iDrive With PDC activated: "Rear view camera" The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐ played. The setting is saved for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Brightness With rear-view camera switched on: The distance between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch can be estimated with the aid of two static semicircles. A docking-on line dependent on the steering angle helps you to aim at the trailer with your trailer tow hitch. The zoom function can be enabled when the camera is switched on. 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Contrast With rear-view camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. Displaying the trailer tow hitch via iDrive, see page 111. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Activating assistance functions Camera A number of assistance functions can be active simultaneously. The zoom function for towing a trailer can only be activated individually. Displaying parking assistance lines "Parking help lines" Driving lane and turning circle lines are dis‐ played. Displaying obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially shaped markings are displayed. The camera lens is located between the num‐ berplate lights. Dirt can impair the quality of the picture. Clean the lens, see page 274. Displaying the trailer tow hitch "Trailer tow bar - zoom" The zoom to the trailer tow hitch is displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 111 Controls Driving comfort Park assistant Suitable parking space Principle ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft each. ▷ Minimum length: own vehicle plus approxi‐ mately 1.2 m, 4 ft. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 1.5 m, 5 ft. For parking Closed doors. Switch on The system supports you when parking in par‐ allel to the road. Using the button Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The park assistant calculates the ideal parking line and takes over steering during the process of parking. When parking up, also follow the visual and au‐ dible instructions of the PDC and the park assist and accelerate or brake. The park assistant incorporates Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 106. Personal responsibility The park assistant does not take your per‐ sonal responsibility from you when you are park‐ ing. Monitor the parking space and the parking pro‐ cedure by directly looking. If applicable, interfere to avoid accidents.◀ Requirements To measure parking spaces Press the button. LED is illuminated. The current status of the parking space search is displayed on the control display. Parking assist is automatically activated. When engaging reverse gear Engage reverse gear. The current status of the parking space search is displayed on the control display. Activating: "Parking assistance" Select the symbol on the control display. ▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards up to approximately 36 km/h, 22 mph. ▷ Maximum distance to the row of parking ve‐ hicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft. 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort Display on the control display Activating/deactivating system Controls ▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space suitable. If the programme is active, the vehicle will park into the parking space. ▷ Nothing displayed: no parking space search. Symbol Meaning Grey: system not available. White: system available but not acti‐ vated. System is activated. Status of the system Parking with the park assistant Personal responsibility The park assistant does not take your per‐ sonal responsibility from you when you are park‐ ing. Monitor the parking space and the parking pro‐ cedure by directly looking. If applicable, interfere to avoid accidents.◀ Also monitor the traffic situation Loud noises on the outside or the inside of the vehicle which could drown the warning sound of the park assistant or PDC. Please additionally monitor the traffic situation around the vehicle to avoid accidents.◀ Grey: system not activated. Park‐ ing space search. Blue: system is activated. Found suitable parking space. Parking process active. Steering has been taken over. 1. Switch on the park assistant and activate, if applicable. Status of the parking space search is dis‐ played on the control display. 2. Follow the instructions on the control dis‐ play. The end of the parking process is displayed on the control display. 3. Straighten up the parking position, if appli‐ cable. Status of the parking space search Notes ▷ The park assistant takes over steering as long as the symbol for the active parking process is displayed. ▷ The system manoeuvres to optimally park in smaller parking spaces. ▷ To achieve an optimum parking position, wait for the automatic steering process after changing gear at standstill. ▷ Grey, arrow 1: parking space search. ▷ You must indicate accordingly when parking into parking spaces on the driver's side. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 113 Controls Driving comfort Cancel manually Carrying loads You can cancel the park assistant at any time by: ▷ Holding the steering wheel or steering your‐ self. ▷ "Parking assistance" Select the symbol on the control display. Cancel automatically The system automatically cancels: ▷ At speeds over approximately 10 km/h, 6 mph. Loads that protrude the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking process. This means that you must pay full attention so that you are able to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise there is the risk of an accident.◀ Curbs Where applicable, the park assistant may steer across curbs or up onto curbs. A Check Control message is displayed. Therefore, pay full attention so that you are able to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise there is the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres or the rest of the vehicle.◀ Continue No park assistant You can continue a cancelled parking process, if applicable. The park assistant does not support parking: For this purpose, follow the instructions on the control display. ▷ When towing a trailer. ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. ▷ When doors are open. ▷ On sharp bends. Restrictions of the function Switch off The system can be deactivated by: The function can be restricted, for example in the following situations: ▷ ▷ If the sensors are dirty or iced-up. Press the button. ▷ Switch the ignition off. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The park assistant has failed. Have the system checked. System limits If a parking space changes The system does not take changes to a parking space that has already been measured into account. This means that you must pay full attention so that you are able to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise there is the risk of an accident.◀ 114 ▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow. ▷ When on uneven road surfaces, for example gravel roads. ▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted or been piled up in the parking gap. Limits of the ultrasound measurement Detection of objects might not be possible if the physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring prin‐ ciple are exceeded, for instance by: ▷ Trailer noses and hitches. ▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Higher, protruding objects, for example breaks of walls or loads. ▷ Objects with corners and sharp edges. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving comfort Controls ▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, e.g. fences. Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind areas before or af‐ ter a continuous audible signal is given. Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable. In some cases, parking spaces may be detected that are not suitable. Tyre size For an optimum parking position, BMW ap‐ proved tyres of size 205/55 R 16 or larger are recommended. Ultrasonic sensors The ultrasonic sensors to measure parking spaces are located on the wheel trim. To ensure correct functionality: ▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice. ▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure cleaners for an extended period of time and maintain a distance of at least 30 cm, 12 in. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 115 Controls Climate Climate Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Air conditioning 1 Seat heating, left 45 5 Temperature 2 Air distribution 6 Seat heating, right 45 3 Heated rear window 7 Cooling function 4 Air flow 8 Recirculated-air mode Air conditioning functions in detail Adjusting the air distribution manually Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. 116 ▷ Window glass. ▷ Upper body area ▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell ▷ Footwell Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Climate Defrosting windows and removing condensation Direct air distribution to windows, increase quantity of air and temperature then switch on with cooling function as needed. Heated rear window Press the button. The heated rear window is switched off automatically after a certain time. Adjusting the air flow manually Pressing the button on the left or right reduces or increases the air flow. The air flow of the air conditioning system is re‐ duced as necessary to save the battery. Temperature Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired temperature. The air conditioning controls this temperature as quickly as possi‐ ble and then keeps it constant. Cooling function The interior can only be cooled when the engine is running. Press the button. Air is cooled and dried, then reheated to suit the temperature setting. Depending on weather conditions, the wind‐ screen may mist over momentarily when the en‐ gine is started. Controls Recirculated-air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the interior of the car can be shut off. The air inside the car is then recirculated. Press button repeatedly to call up an operating mode: ▷ LED off: ambient air is constantly entering the car. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ambient air supply is permanently shut off. In the event of condensation, switch off the re‐ circulated-air mode and increase the air flow if necessary. Continuous use of recirculated-air mode Recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually deteriorate.◀ Switching system on/off Switch off In the lowest setting, press the left of the button. Switch on Press any key until the keys for the seat heating. Microfilter In outside and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐ filter filters dust and pollen from the air. This filter should be changed during mainte‐ nance on your vehicle, see page 252. Condensation water, see page 134, develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 117 Controls Climate Automatic air conditioning 1 Seat heating, left 45 9 2 Temperature, left 10 Air distribution, right 3 AUTO program 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 4 Display 12 Air distribution, left 5 Maximum cooling effect 13 Heated rear window 6 Temperature, right 14 Interior temperature sensor — never cover 7 Seat heating, right 45 8 Cooling function 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ sation Air conditioning functions in detail Temperature Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired temperature. AUC/recirculated-air mode Avoid switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession. The automatic air conditioning will otherwise not have sufficient time to establish the temperature selected. AUTO program Press the button. The automatic air conditioning sets this tem‐ perature as quickly as possible, using higher cooling or heating power if necessary. The tem‐ perature is then maintained. 118 The air flow, air distribution and tem‐ perature are automatically regulated. Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and external influences, the air is di‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Climate rected towards the windscreen, side windows, and upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, see page 119, is switched on automatically in the AUTO program. A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐ gram so that condensation is avoided as much as possible. Intensity of AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, the auto‐ matic control of air flow and air distribution can be changed. Controls When using the automatic air conditioning, con‐ densation water, see page 134, develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Automatic air recirculation control, AUC/recirculated-air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the interior of the car can be shut off. The air inside the car is then recirculated. Press button repeatedly to call up an operating mode: Pressing the button on the left or right reduces or increases intensity. ▷ LEDs off: ambient air is constantly entering the car. The selected intensity is shown on the display for automatic air conditioning. ▷ Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor de‐ tects pollutants in the outside air and shuts it out automatically. Maximum cooling effect ▷ Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ambient air supply is permanently shut off. Press the button. System is set to the lowest tempera‐ ture, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode. The air flows from the outlets for the upper body area. These should therefore be left open. With the engine running the air is cooled as quickly as possible. If there is condensation on the window, switch off recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to use the condensation sensor. Ensure that air can flow towards the windscreen. Continuous use of recirculated-air mode The air flow can be adapted when the program is active. Recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually deteriorate.◀ Cooling function Adjusting the air distribution manually The interior can only be cooled when the engine is running. Press the button. Air is cooled and dried, then reheated to suit the temperature setting. Depending on weather conditions, the wind‐ screen may mist over momentarily when the en‐ gine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally in the AUTO program. Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐ gram: ▷ Upper body area ▷ Upper body area and footwell ▷ Footwell ▷ Windows and footwell: only on the driver’s side ▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell: only on the driver’s side Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 119 Controls Climate If there is condensation on the window, press the AUTO button in order to use the condensa‐ tion sensor. Adjusting the air flow manually To be able to regulate the air flow manually, first switch off the AUTO program. Pressing the button on the left or right reduces or increases the air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display for automatic air conditioning. Microfilter/activated charcoal filter In outside and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐ filter/activated carbon filter filters dust, pollen and harmful gases from the air. This filter should be changed during mainte‐ nance on your vehicle, see page 252. Ventilation Ventilation at front In order to protect the battery the air flow rate of the automatic air conditioning is reduced, if nec‐ essary. Heated rear window Press the button. The heated rear window is switched off automatically after a certain time. Defrosting windows and removing condensation Press the button. This removes ice and condensation quickly from the windscreen and from the front side windows. The air flow can be adapted when the program is active. If there is condensation on the window, switch on the cooling function as well or press the AUTO button to use the condensation sensor. Switching system on/off ▷ Lever to change the direction in which air flows, arrow 1 ▷ Knurled wheels to open and close the air outlets continuously, arrow 2 ▷ Knurled wheel for varying the temperature, arrow 3. Towards blue: cooler Towards red: warmer. Setting the ventilation ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Adjust the outlets so that air is directed to‐ wards you, for example if the car's interior has become hot. ▷ Draught-free ventilation: Switch off In the lowest setting, press the left of the button. Adjust the outlets so that the air flows past you. Switch on Press any key until the keys for the seat heating. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Climate Ventilation in rear passenger compartment Controls Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set desired time. Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" ▷ Knurled wheel to open and close the air out‐ lets continuously, arrow 1 Symbol on automatic air conditioning is illu‐ minated when switch-on time is activated. ▷ Knurled wheel for varying the temperature, arrow 2. Symbol on the automatic air conditioning system flashes when the system has cut in. Towards blue: cooler Towards red: warmer. ▷ Lever to change the direction in which air flows, arrow 3 The system switches on within the next 24 hours only. Afterwards, it must be reactiva‐ ted. Independent ventilation Principle The independent ventilation system ventilates the passenger compartment and lowers its tem‐ perature under some circumstances. The system can be switched on and off at any ambient temperature either directly or via two preselected switch-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Open the ventilation vents so the air can flow out. Operation is done using the iDrive. Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate ind. ventilation" Symbol on the automatic air conditioning system flashes when the system is switched on. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 121 Controls Interior equipment Interior equipment Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Ashtray/lighter The cigarette lighter is located in the centre con‐ sole. Ashtray Press in the cigarette lighter. Opening The cigarette lighter can be re‐ moved when it pops back out. Connecting electrical appliances Note Do not connect charger to socket Remove lid. Do not connect battery charger to the sockets installed in the vehicle in the factory, otherwise this could damage the vehicle.◀ Emptying Lift out the insert. Power sockets Lighter Risk of sustaining burns Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its knob, otherwise you may suffer burns. When leaving the vehicle, always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control so that, for instance, children cannot operate the ciga‐ rette lighter and burn themselves.◀ 122 Cigarette lighter socket can be used a socket for electrical devices when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 Watt at 12 Volt. To avoid damage to the socket, do not insert an incompatible plug. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Interior equipment Controls Front centre console Inside the boot Remove the cover or lighter. Socket is on the right in the boot. In front seat passenger compartment Boot Boot cover The boot cover is raised by opening the tailgate. Do not deposit any heavy objects Socket is located under the glove box. Rear centre console Do not deposit any heavy and hard objects on the boot cover. Otherwise they could endan‐ ger vehicle occupants when braking or swerv‐ ing, for instance.◀ Removing and inserting Removing The cover can be removed for stowing bulky items. 1. Holding straps can be suspended on the tailgate. 2. Lift cover and remove towards the rear. Remove the cover. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 123 Controls Interior equipment Inserting 1. Put cover into the holders. Fold in head restraints as needed before the rear backrest is folded down Expanding the boot With foldable head restraints, before folding down the rear backrest, fold in the head re‐ straints, otherwise damage may occur.◀ General Fold down side rear backrests The boot can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests. Right-hand backrest can be folded down sepa‐ rately. Left-hand backrest can be folded down in connection with the centre part. When doing this, fold down the centre head restraints. 2. Hang holding straps on. The rear seat backrest is split 60–40. With load-through system: The rear seat back‐ rest is separated in the ratio 40–20–40. Risk of trapping Before folding the rear seat backrests, al‐ ways check that there is nothing to obstruct their movement. When the centre section in par‐ ticular is folded down, make sure that there is no-one in its movement zone and that no-one reaches into the movement zone of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise injury or damage might occur.◀ Engaging the backrests Before carrying persons in the back, en‐ sure that the backrests are engaged and there‐ fore locked into position. Otherwise the restrain‐ ing effect of the seat belts may be restricted during an accident.◀ Reach into the notch and fold forwards. Folding down centre section 1. Fold down centre head restraints. 2. Reach into the notch and pull the middle part forwards. Correctly engaging the catch When swinging the panel back up, make sure that the catch engages properly, This will cause the red warning panel in the user interface to disappear. Otherwise, the transported load may be propelled inside the vehicle when brak‐ ing or swerving and endanger the vehicle occu‐ pants.◀ Use the middle seat belt If the middle seat belt is used in the rear passenger compartment, the larger backrest half must be locked. Otherwise the seat belt will have no restraining effect.◀ 124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Interior equipment Controls Luggage net Luggage net, large 1. Fold down rear backrests forwards, see page 124. 2. Fold up cover caps up on the roof frame until they engage. 3. Put both upper fastening pins of the luggage rack into the take-ups until they stop, ar‐ row 1, push forwards. 4. Fold up the three eyes on the rear backrests. 5. Hang the luggage net with the lower hooks into the three eyes, arrow 2, raise the rear backrests a little to do this. Luggage net, small As with the large luggage net, with the rear back‐ rest standing upright, the small luggage net can be used. To do this, remove the boot cover and hang the small luggage net onto the eyes on the back seats and into the rear brackets on the roof frame. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 125 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartments Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Glove box Driver's side Opening Notes No loose objects in the interior. Do not store any objects unsecured in the interior, otherwise they could endanger vehicle occupants when braking or swerving, for in‐ stance.◀ No anti-slip matting on the instrument panel. Do not use any kind of anti-slip matting on the instrument panel, otherwise it may be damaged by the materials of the matting.◀ Pull the handle. Close the glove box again immediately After using the glove box while the vehicle is in motion, close it without delay, so that it can‐ not cause injury in the event of an accident.◀ Closing Swing lid up. Storage options The following storage options are located in the interior: Front passenger's side Opening ▷ Without smoker's package: large storage compartment in the centre console in front of the cupholders. ▷ Glove box on the driver's side, see page 126. ▷ Glove box on the passenger side, see page 126. ▷ Storage compartment in the centre console between the front seats, see page 127. ▷ Pockets in the doors, see page 127 ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. Pull the handle. The light in the glove box comes on. ▷ Storage compartment in the centre console in the back, see page 128. 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Storage compartments Close the glove box again immediately After using the glove box while the vehicle is in motion, close it without delay, so that it can‐ not cause injury in the event of an accident.◀ Controls Storage compartment between the front seats Storage compartment A storage compartment is between the front seats Closing Swing lid up. Connection for external audio device USB interface for data transfer Connection for importing and exporting data on a USB medium, for example: ▷ Personal Profile settings, see page 31. ▷ Music collection, see page 183. ▷ With Professional navigation system: im‐ porting trips, see page 156. When connecting, bear the following in mind: An external audio device, for example, MP3 player, can be connected. ▷ AUX-IN port, see page 188. ▷ USB audio interface, see page 189. Centre armrest Opening ▷ Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB in‐ terface. ▷ Do not connect any devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect up USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB audio interface for charging external devices. Pockets in the doors Do not store any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, for ex‐ ample, glass bottles, otherwise there is the in‐ creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent.◀ Fold the centre armrest upwards. Sliding Central armrest can be slid in the longitudinal direction. It engages into the end positions. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 127 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartment in the rear Storage compartment is in the centre console in the rear. Cupholder Notes Pull centre armrest forward with the loop. Unbreakable containers and no hot bev‐ erages Use light and unbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not force unsuitable containers into the cupholder. Otherwise damage may result.◀ To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in one after the other. Push covers back into position Push covers back into position before the centre armrest is folded up, otherwise the cu‐ pholder may become damaged.◀ Coat hooks Front The clothes hooks are located on the grab han‐ dles in the rear. Keep a clear view Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver’s view.◀ No heavy objects Fittings for front cupholders Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks as they could endanger the vehicle occupants, for example in the case of braking or evasive manoeuvres.◀ Fittings for using the cupholder as an additional storage compartment. To do this, put the fittings into the cupholder. Only use fittings for small object, for exaple a key or remote control. Rear In the centre armrest. 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Storage compartments Storage compartments in the boot Side storage compartment left Controls jects fly around in the case of braking and eva‐ sive manoeuvres. Only transport heavy luggage with suitable means of securing in the boot.◀ Tensioning strap There is a tensioning strap on the right-hand trim panel for securing small objects. Lashing eyes in the boot For securing the load, see page 135, two or four lashing eyes are in the boot. On the left side is a storage compartment for onboard tool, warning triangle and first aid kit. Turn to open the handle. Side storage compartment, right Floor net For securing the load, see page 135, and for keeping small parts, the floot net can also be used. There is a storage compartment on the right side of the floor of the boot. Net for storage compartment Smaller items can be stowed in the net of the right storage compartment. Hooks/bag holders On the loading edge of the boot cover there is a bag holder on each side. The bag holders can be loaded up to max. 4 kg, approx. 8.8 lb. Only light and suitable objects Only hang light shopping bags or suitable objects on the holders. Otherwise, these can endanger vehicle occupants, for example if ob‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving hints The Driving hints chapter provides you with information that you may require in particular driving situations or operating modes. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving hints Driving precautions Driving precautions Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Brake system Brake pads and discs only achieve a favourable wear and contact pattern after approximately 500 km, 300 miles. Drive moderately during this running-in period. Clutch Running in General Moving parts need a certain time to achieve maximum operating efficiency as a unit. The following information helps to achieve max‐ imum service life and efficiency of the vehicle. Engine and final drive Please observe the valid speed limit in the re‐ spective country you are travelling in. Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles Do not exceed the maximum engine revs and speed: ▷ For petrol engines, 4500 rpm and 160 km/h, 100 mph. ▷ For diesel engines, 3500 rpm and 150 km/h, 93 mph. Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic transmission kick-down. From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards Engine and road speeds can be gradually in‐ creased. The clutch only begins to function optimally at approx. 500 km, 300 miles. Engage the clutch gently during this running-in period. After fitting new parts The same running-in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. General driving notes Closing the tailgate Drive with the tailgate closed Drive only with the tailgate closed, as oth‐ erwise the vehicle occupants and other road users could be at risk or the vehicle could be damaged in the event of an accident or if you have to brake abruptly or swerve to avoid an ob‐ struction. There is also the danger of exhaust fumes entering the passenger compartment.◀ If there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐ gate open: ▷ Close all windows and the glass roof. ▷ Turn up the blower to a high output level. Tyres New tyres do not achieve their full road grip im‐ mediately, for production reasons. 132 During the first 300 km, 200 miles, drive mod‐ erately. ▷ Maintain moderate speed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Driving precautions Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures occur in the exhaust system. Driving hints Mobile communication equipment Mobile communication equipment Never remove the heat shields fitted here, or ap‐ ply underseal to them. When driving, idling or parking, ensure that no highly inflammable ma‐ terials, e.g. hay, foliage, grass etc. comes into contact with the hot exhaust system. It could ig‐ nite and cause a fire, with the risk of severe in‐ juries or damage. You are advised not to use mobile radio devices, for example, mobile phones, inside the vehicle without a direct connection to an exter‐ nal aerial. Mutual interference between the ve‐ hicle’s electronics and such equipment cannot be entirely ruled out. There is moreover no guar‐ antee that the radiation generated when such devices are transmitting will be dissipated out of the vehicle’s interior.◀ Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise there is a risk of burns.◀ Aquaplaning Diesel particle filter On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tyres and the road. The diesel particle filter collects soot particles and burns them periodically at high tempera‐ tures. When cleaning for a few minutes, the following may occur: ▷ Engine temporarily runs a bit roughly. ▷ Noise and slight development of smoke from the exhaust shortly after shutting off the engine. ▷ The usual power output development re‐ quires a slightly higher engine speed. Radio signals Warning The vehicle’s performance may be affec‐ ted by interference from high frequency radio signals. Such signals are output from a series of transmission systems, for example, from air traf‐ fic beacons or relay stations for mobile telecom‐ munications. We recommend you consult your Service Cen‐ tre should you experience any difficulties.◀ This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that the tyre can actually lose contact com‐ pletely with the road surface and the car can neither be steered nor the brakes properly ap‐ plied. Aquaplaning On wet or slushy roads, reduce your speed in order to avoid aquaplaning.◀ Wading If the water is calm drive no faster than walking speed, approximately 10 km/h, 6 mph and only up to a maximum water depth of approximately 25 cm, 9.8 inches. Pay attention to the water depth and your speed Do not exceed the water depth and walking speed, as otherwise the engine, electrical sys‐ tem and transmission could be damaged.◀ Safe braking Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is nec‐ essary. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 133 Driving hints Driving precautions The vehicle can be steered. Any obstacles can be avoided with steering wheel movements that are as calm as possible. A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic reg‐ ulating sounds indicate that ABS is regulating. Objects in the range of movement of the pedals No objects in the range of movement of the pedals Foot mats, carpets or other objects must not breach the range of movement of the pedals, as otherwise they could influence the function of the pedals when driving. Do not place additional foot mats on top of ex‐ isting floor mats or other similar objects. Only use foot mats that have been approved for the vehicle and that can be fastened accord‐ ingly. Ensure that floor mats are securely reattached after having been removed, for example for cleaning.◀ The braking action of the engine can be boosted further by shifting down in the manual mode of the automatic transmission. Avoid excessive braking Avoid excessive loads on the brake. Even slight, continuous pressure on the brake pedal could cause overheating, brake pad wear or even brake system failure.◀ Do not drive with the transmission in neu‐ tral Never drive with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off. Otherwise, the braking action of the engine will either not be present, or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering.◀ Corrosion of the brake disc Corrosion of the brake discs and contamination of the brake pads increase with: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used. Wet roads ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. In damp weather or heavy rain, apply the brakes lightly every few kilometres/miles. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. In doing so, do not obstruct other road users. The resulting heat dries the brake discs and pads. The braking force will be available immediately if needed. Downhill gradients When driving on long or steep downhill stretches, use the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise the brake system can overheat and braking action is reduced. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected. Condensate when vehicle is parked When using the automatic air conditioning, con‐ densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Traces of water on the ground are therefore nor‐ mal. Manual gearbox: The braking effect can be additionally increased by shifting down, even into first gear, if applica‐ ble. Automatic transmission 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Loads Driving hints Loads Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. General Overloading the vehicle So that the permitted load capacity of the tyres is not exceeded, do not overload the vehi‐ cle. The tyres could then overheat and sustain internal damage. Under certain circumstances, sudden tyre pressure loss will be the conse‐ quence.◀ ▷ Do not stack storage goods above the upper edge of the backrests. ▷ Stow heavy transported loads as far forward and as low down as possible, directly behind the rear seat. ▷ Fully fold down the rear-seat backrest if the load is to be stowed accordingly. ▷ Use the luggage net, see page 125, to pro‐ tect the vehicle's occupants. Make sure that objects cannot pass through the luggage net. ▷ Cover angular or sharp objects that could hit the rear window during the journey. Securing the load Lashing eyes in the boot No fluids in the boot Ensure that fluid leakage does not occur in the boot. Otherwise the vehicle could be dam‐ aged.◀ Loading For securing the load two or four lashing eyes are in the boot. Floor net For securing the load and for keeping small parts, the floot net can also be used. ▷ Very heavy transported load: with no pas‐ sengers on the back seat, insert both outer seat belts into the respective opposite buck‐ les. ▷ Wrap protective material round sharp cor‐ ners and edges. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 135 Driving hints Loads Roof strip with flaps Hang the floor net on the eyes in the boot floor. Securing transported loads ▷ Smaller and lighter parts: with tensioning straps, to secure the floor net or other suit‐ able straps. ▷ Relatively large and heavy objects: secure with lashing straps. Fasten tensioning straps of various kinds to the lashing eyes in the boot. Securing transported loads Accommodate and secure the transpor‐ ted load as described above, otherwise it could endanger the vehicle occupants, for example, when braking and swerving. Heavy and hard objects must not be stored un‐ secured in the interior, otherwise these could endanger the vehicle occupants, for example, when braking and swerving. Do not exceed the permitted overall weight and permitted axle loads, otherwise the operational safety of the vehicle can no longer be guaran‐ teed and the permit regulations are not met.◀ The mounting points are located on the roof strip above the doors. Fold the cover outwards. Loads A loaded roof rack alters the car's road behav‐ iour and steering response by shifting its centre of gravity. When loading and driving, bear the following in mind: ▷ Do not exceed permitted roof and axle load as well as the permitted gross weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load evenly. ▷ The roof load must not be spread over a large area. ▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bottom. ▷ Securely fasten roof rack, e.g. with tension‐ ing straps. ▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the swing range of the tailgate. ▷ Drive smoothly and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion, braking or cornering. Roof rack Fastening Follow fitting instruction of the roof rack. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Towing a trailer Driving hints Towing a trailer Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. tribution Hitch or Load Levelling Device on any BMW Group vehicles. The use of such devices may affect the vehicle’s warranty status. We recommend you consult your Authorised BMW Dealer for any further advice or clarifica‐ tion. Before a journey General Nose weight The permitted trailer load is indicated in the technical data. Information on possibilities to increase the load can be provided by any Service centre. The vehicle is equipped with reinforced springs on the rear axle and, depending on the type, with a more powerful engine cooling system. For Australia/New Zealand Towing Australian standard AS 4177.1-2004 Caravan and light trailer towing components – towbars and towing brackets contains the following statement, which is hereby accepted by the BMW Group Australia: FOR TOWING ONLY. The trailer tow hitch supplied with your BMW vehicle should only be used for towing and not in connection with any kind of transport device attached to the trailer tow hitch, i.e. bicycle car‐ riers or similar. As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are de‐ signed, tested and approved as a single unit, the practice of modifying or replacing the BMW sup‐ plied towball mount assembly is not approved. Use only the genuine BMW towball mount as‐ sembly. BMW Group Australia does not recommend or support the installation and use of a Weight Dis‐ ▷ Minimum nose weight: 25 kg, 55 lb. ▷ Maximum nose weight: 75 kg, approxi‐ mately 165 lb. Where possible, make full use of this weight. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose weight reduce the maximum load of your car. The nose weight increases the vehicle weight. The total permitted weight of the towing vehicle, see Technical data, must not be exceeded as a result. Loads Stow the load as low as possible and as close as possible to the axle. A low centre of trailer gravity makes the vehicle combination much more stable and safe to drive. The permitted total weight of the trailer and the permitted axle load of the vehicle (see Technical data) may not be exceeded. The smaller value is the limit which should be adhered to. Tyre pressures Check the vehicle’s and the trailer’s tyre pres‐ sures carefully. On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure, see page 238, for higher loads applies. For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac‐ turer apply. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 137 Driving hints Towing a trailer Runflat indicator Maximum speed when towing a trailer Reinitialise the runflat indicator after a trailer has been attached or detached or the inflation pres‐ sure has been corrected. Exterior mirrors Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor‐ ners of the trailer into your field of view are re‐ quired by law. Mirrors of this kind can be ob‐ tained from your Service centre as optional accessories. Power consumption The power output of the trailer’s rear lights must not exceed the following values: ▷ Turn indicators: 42 Watts per side ▷ Rear lights: 60 Watts per side ▷ Brake lights: 84 Watts total ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 Watts total ▷ Reversing lights: 42 Watts total Keep the switch-on times of the current con‐ sumer units in the caravan mode short in order not to place an excessive load on the vehicle battery. Function of the rear lights Before beginning your journey, check the function of the rear lights of the trailer, as other‐ wise this might endanger other road users.◀ Towing a trailer Counteracting snaking If the trailer begins to snake, the vehicle combi‐ nation can only be stabilised by braking hard im‐ mediately. Make sure that the necessary steering correc‐ tions are carried out as cautiously as possible, taking other road users into consideration. Uphill gradients In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients steeper than 12 % when towing a trailer. If higher trailer loads are permitted later, the limit is 8 %. Downhill gradients On downward inclines, a vehicle combination has tendency to snake at an earlier stage. Before the downward incline, shift down to the next-lowest gear and drive downwards slowly. High loads and high outside temperature Long journeys with a high load and outside temperature Notes Appropriate speed when towing a trailer Keep to an appropriate speed when tow‐ ing a trailer. Speeds in excess of approximately 80 km/h, 50 mph can be enough to produce a swaying or fishtailing motion, depending on the design of the trailer and the load it is carrying.◀ 138 If you are towing a trailer, increase tyre pressures by 0.2 bar all round and do not exceed a top speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph, as the higher axle load could result in damage to the tyres if the car is driven at higher speeds. Note the max‐ imum possible tyre pressures stated on the tyres.◀ On long journeys with a high trailer load and high outside temperature, make sure that the fuel tank is more than 1/4 full, as otherwise the en‐ gine output can decrease or engine damage can occur.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Towing a trailer Trailer Stability Control Principle The system helps you to neutralise a trailer’s tendency to swing from side to side. Driving hints Trailer tow hitch with removable ball linkage Storage It detects snaking movements and promptly brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to below the critical range and the vehicle combi‐ nation is stabilised. If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no trailer is attached, for example during use of a bicycle carrier with lights, the system may be‐ come active in extreme driving situations. Operating requirements The system is operational when towing a trailer and when using the trailer socket as of approxi‐ mately 65 km/h, 40 mph. The removable ball linkage is stored beneath the floor panel of the boot. Take-up for ball linkage System limits ▷ The system cannot intervene if the trailer veers instantly, for example on slippery or loose road surfaces. ▷ Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before a swinging motion is detected. ▷ The system is not operational if Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deactivated or has failed. The take-up of the removable ball linkage is on the underside of the vehicle. Follow maintenance instructions, see page 274. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 139 Driving hints Towing a trailer Ball linkage, overview Insert ball linkage Do not keep hand in the area of the hand‐ wheel While inserting, do not keep hand in the area of the handwheel, otherwise it can be jammed and there is risk of injury.◀ 1. Pull the cover stopper of the take-up down‐ wards and store in the vehicle. 1 Green marking 2. Insert the ball linkage from underneath in the take-up and push upwards until it engages. 2 Marking red or green 3. Lock the lock in the handwheel. 3 Trigger lever 4. Remove the key. 4 Handwheel 5. Attach the cap to the lock. 5 Cover cap for lock or key Checking the interlock Checking the interlock Attach ball linkage Before attaching Before fitting the ball linkage, the locking system must be prepared: 1. If the key is not stopped in the lock, open the lock with the key. 2. Pull out handwheel, arrow 1, and turn in the direction of arrow 2 until it stops. Before driving with a trailer or load carrier, make sure that the ball head is properly locked, as unstable driving conditions and/or accidents can otherwise result.◀ Ensure that the ball linkage is properly engaged by shaking it. If the ball linkage is not fitted firmly, check the following points: ▷ Green marking on the handwheel is above the green area of the ball linkage. ▷ The handwheel is flush with the ball linkage. ▷ The lock is locked and the key is removed. Check with the Service centre if all points are met and the ball linkage is not firmly fitted. Remove ball linkage 1. Remove cap from the lock. The ball linkage can be inserted when the following points have been met: ▷ Trigger lever is on the ball linkage. ▷ Red marking of the handwheel is above the green area on the ball linkage. 140 2. Insert key and unlock the lock in the hand‐ wheel. The key is stopped with the lock unlocked. 3. Hold ball linkage firmly. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Towing a trailer Driving hints 4. Pull out handwheel, arrow 1, and turn in the direction of arrow 2 until it stops. 5. Pull ball linkage from the take-up. 6. Let go of the handwheel, the key remains in the lock. 7. Attach the cap to the key. 8. Plug the cover stopper into the take-up Trailer socket The trailer socket is underneath the bumper next to the ball linkage. Swivelling in and out Allow the trailer socket to cool before swivelling out Trailer socket can get hot due to exhaust gases. Do not swivel out immediately after the end of the trip, otherwise there is the risk of burning!◀ Swivel trailer socket in or out up to the end po‐ sition. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 141 Driving hints Saving fuel Saving fuel Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Checking tyre pressures regularly Check and, if necessary, correct tyre inflation pressures at least twice a month and before set‐ ting off on a longer journey. Insufficient tyre inflation pressure enlarges the rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con‐ sumption and tyre wear. General Your vehicle contains wide-ranging technolo‐ gies for reducing consumption and emission levels. Fuel consumption depends on various factors. A number of measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence the fuel consump‐ tion and the burden on the environment. Removing transported load that is not required Extra weight increases fuel consumption. Removing add-on parts after use Driving off immediately Do not warm up the engine with the car at a standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away, driving at moderate engine speeds. A cold engine will then reach its operating tem‐ perature faster. Driving with foresight Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. Keep an appropriate distance from the preced‐ ing vehicle. Anticipating the road situation and adopting a smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐ tion. Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks and rearmounted racks after use. Avoid high engine speeds Add-on parts on the car interfere with its aero‐ dynamic performance and inflate fuel consump‐ tion. Use 1st gear to drive off. As from 2nd gear, ac‐ celerate quickly. Avoid high engine speeds and shift up quickly. Closing windows and the glass roof Shift into the highest possible gear when you have reached the desired speed and drive at a constant speed with the lowest possible engine speed. An opened glass roof or opened window increa‐ ses the drag coefficient and thus the fuel con‐ sumption. 142 Basic principle: driving at low engine speeds re‐ duces fuel consumption and wear. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Saving fuel Driving hints The shift point indicator of your vehicle indicates the most economical gear. For this reason, switch these functions off if they are not required. Making use of coasting Having the car serviced On approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and allow the car to roll. Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve optimal economy and service life. It is recom‐ mended to have maintenance work performed by your Service centre. On downward stretches, take your foot off the accelerator and allow the car to roll. The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting. See also the BMW Maintenance System, see page 252. Switching off the engine when stationary ECO PRO When you stop the car for longer periods, for example at traffic lights, railway crossings or in traffic jams, switch off the engine. Auto Start Stop function The Auto Start Stop function of your vehicle shuts off the engine automatically during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then started again, the fuel consumption and emissions are reduced compared with a permanently running engine. Savings can be made just by stopping the engine for a few seconds. By using this system, premature wear can be caused to certain components of the vehicle. Fuel consumption also depends on other fac‐ tors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors, for ex‐ ample. Switching off functions that are not necessary at the moment Functions such as seat heating or heated rear window require a great deal of energy and con‐ sume additional fuel, especially in city traffic and stop/go traffic. Principle ECO PRO supports a low energy consumption driving style. To do this, the engine control and comfort functions are adjusted, such as, for ex‐ ample, the air conditioning power. In addition, situation-dependent instructions can be displayed which help you to drive with optimum fuel consumption. In the instrument cluster, the extension of the range achieved as a result can be displayed. Activate ECO PRO Press the button until ECO PRO is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Display in the instrument cluster ECO PRO bonus range An extension of range can be achieved due to adjusted driving style. This can be displayed as bonus range in the instrument cluster. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 143 Driving hints Saving fuel Driving style Configure ECO PRO In the revolution counter, a mark‐ ing in the bar display shows the current efficiency of the driving style according to the gas pedal setting. ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the marking moves in the blue area. Via driver experience switch 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" 4. Configure the program. ▷ Grey display: adjust driving style, for exam‐ ple, by coming off the gas. The display changes to blue as soon as all the conditions for driving with optimised fuel con‐ sumption are met. ECO PRO tip - driving instruction The arrow shows that the driving style can be adjusted to be more efficient on fuel consumption by coming off the gas. Via iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "ECO PRO mode" Additional Symbols Symbol Measure or 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" Come off the gas for efficient driving style and decelerate carefully. 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. ECO PRO tip Automatic transmission: switch from S/M to D and/or avoid manual changes. Gearbox: follow gear change instruc‐ tions. Gearbox: engage idling for engine stop. Configure the program. ▷ "Tip at:": Adjust ECO Pro speed, when an ECO PRO tip is shown. ▷ "ECO PRO limit": A reminder is shown if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded. ECO PRO air conditioning "ECO PRO climate control" The air conditioning is adjusted for efficient fuel consumption. A slight deviation from the temperature set and/ or a longer heating up and/or cooling down of the 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Saving fuel Driving hints interior is therefore possible, in order to lower consumption. The following systems are shown: The power to the seat heating is also reduced. ▷ Energy recuperation. ECO PRO Potential It is shown how much percentage of the possible saving potential can be achieved with the cur‐ rent configuration. Display on the Control Display ▷ Auto Start Stop function. ▷ Air conditioning power. Show ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO tips" The setting is stored for the currently used pro‐ file. EfficientDynamics When travelling, information on consumption and technology is shown. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "EfficientDynamics" Show fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be shown in the set time span. "Consumption history" Set time fuel consumption history time span Select symbol. Select symbol. Reset fuel consumption history 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Reset consumption history" Show EfficientDynamics Info The current type of action can be shown. "EfficientDynamics Info" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation Various examples of how the navigation system reliably guides you to your destination are shown here. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation Navigation system Navigation system Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. General The navigation system can determine the pre‐ cise position of the vehicle by means of satellites and vehicle sensors and guide you reliably to any specified destination. Navigation data is saved in the vehicle and can be updated. Inputs when the vehicle is stationary Only enter data when the car is stationary, and always obey the traffic regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system. You could otherwise commit an offence and put vehicle occupants and other road users at risk.◀ Destination input Manual destination input General When you are entering a town/city or street name, the system supports you with automatic name completion and input matching, see page 20. Saved town/city and street names can be called up quickly. ▷ You can skip input of the country, town or city if you wish to retain previous inputs. ▷ If only the town/city has been entered, route guidance to the town/city centre is started. Country input 1. "Navigation" 2. "Destination input" Call up navigation system Press the button on the controller. 1. 3. Select "Country" or the country displayed. 2. "Navigation" The navigation system can also be directly called up with the button on the controller. 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Entering a town/city 1. Select "City/Postcode" or the town/city dis‐ played. Navigation Alternatively, enter street and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter street in the same way as town/city. 3. "Building number" 4. Select digits. 5. Move to the list of house numbers. 6. Select the house number or a range of house numbers. Road/street not in the destination 2. Select letters, if applicable. The list is gradually narrowed down with each input. The desired road/street is not in the entered town/city because it is part of another city dis‐ trict. 3. Tilt the controller to the right. 1. "Navigation" 4. Select the name of a town/city from the list. 2. "Destination input" If there are several places with the same name: 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 1. Move to the list of place names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city. Entering the postcode 4. Move to the list of street names. 5. "In" select country listed. All the roads/streets of the selected country are offered. The respective town or city is shown after the street name. 1. Select "City/Postcode" or the town/city dis‐ played. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Select digits. 4. Move to the list of postcodes and towns/cit‐ ies. 5. Mark entry. 6. Select an entry. 6. Select the letters. Entering a street and junction 7. Move to the list of street names. 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 8. Highlight the street. 2. Enter the street or junction in the same way as the town/city. 9. Select the street. If there are several streets with the same name: Starting route guidance after destination input 1. Move to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 1. "Accept destination" 3. Select the street. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 149 Navigation Navigation system 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" 5. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" Enter, see page 155, destination as a fur‐ ther destination. Address book Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses for the contacts have been checked as destinations. 6. If applicable, select an existing contact. 7. "Work address" or "Home address" 8. Enter "Surname" and, if applicable, "First name". 9. "Save in car" Saving position The current position can be saved in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. Select a contact from the list or use "A-Z search". 3. "Save position as a contact" or "Add position to contact" 4. Where applicable, "Work address" or "Home address" Saving a destination in the address book After destination input, save the destination in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. Call up "Options". 4. Select an existing contract from the list, de‐ pending on the selection. Select type of ad‐ dress and enter surname and first names. 5. "Save in car" Edit or delete the address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Navigation 3. Mark entry. Starting route guidance 4. Call up "Options". 1. "Navigation" 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry" 2. "Last destinations" Accepting your home address as a destination 3. Select destination. 4. "Start guidance" The home address must be created. Editing a destination 1. "Navigation" 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 2. "Last destinations" 3. "Home address" 3. Highlight destination. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Edit destination" Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight destination. 4. Call up "Options". 4. "Start guidance" Last destinations Overview The last destinations reached are saved auto‐ matically. These destinations can be called up and incor‐ porated into route guidance. Calling up last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations" Points of interest General Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information on individual points of interest may have changed, for example, service stations may not be in operation. Calling up the search for points of interest Selection of points of interest, for example ho‐ tels or sights: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of interest" 3. Select search. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 151 Navigation Navigation system With Professional navigation system: Google™ Local Search If several details are included, you can browse through the pages. 1. "Google™ Local Search" If a phone number is saved, a telephone con‐ nection can be established. 2. "City" Select or enter location. 9. 3. "Keyword" 4. Enter keyword. Enter destination as a further destination, see page 155. Suggestions are displayed. 5. Select suggestion. The list of points of interest is displayed. 6. Select a point of interest. Details are displayed. If several details are included, you can browse through the pages. If a phone number is saved, a telephone con‐ nection can be established. 7. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" "Start search": without entering a search term, the search is repeated using the last stored search term. Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "City" Select or enter location. 3. "Category" 4. Selecting a category. 5. "Category details" Enter destination as a further destination, see page 155. With Professional navigation system: for some special destinations, several category details can be selected. Tilt the controller to the left to exit the category details. A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" Several category details can be selected for certain points of interest. Tilt the controller to the left to exit the category details. 2. "City" Select or enter location. 3. "Category" 4. Selecting a category. 5. "Category details" 6. "Start search" The list of points of interest is displayed. 7. Select a point of interest. Details are displayed. With Professional navigation system: for some special destinations, several category details can be selected. Tilt the controller to the left to exit the category details. If several details are included, you can browse through the pages. If a phone number is saved, a telephone con‐ nection can be established. 6. "Keyword" 8. 7. Enter keyword. The list of points of interest is displayed. 8. Select a point of interest. Details are displayed. 152 Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Enter destination as a further destination, see page 155. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Displaying points of interest List of points of interest: points of interest are arranged according to distance and marked with an arrow showing the direction. Navigation The current position of the vehicle is shown in the map. 3. "Interactive map" In the Professional navigation system: in the split screen, points of interest from the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category. Destination input via BMW Assist A connection to the information service, see page 222, is established. 4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs. 1. "Navigation" ▷ To change the scale: turn the controller. 2. "Destination input" ▷ To move the map: tilt the controller in the corresponding direction. 3. Call up "Options". ▷ To move the map diagonally: tilt the con‐ troller in the corresponding direction and turn it. 4. "BMW Assist dest. input" With Professional navigation system: additional information on BMW Online 1. "Navigation" Specifying the street/road 3. Select a point of interest. If the system does not detect a street/road, one of the following items of information is dis‐ played: 4. Call up "Options". ▷ A street name in the vicinity. 5. "Further info (BMW Online)" ▷ The county. 2. "Points of interest" Displaying points of interest in the map To show symbols for the points of interest in the map view: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" ▷ The co-ordinates of the destination. Additional functions Press the controller to access the following ad‐ ditional functions available in the interactive map: 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Display points of interest" 5. Select the setting. Destination input via map Selecting a destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" ▷ Select the symbol. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 153 Navigation Navigation system "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" ▷ "Exit interactive map": back to the map view. ▷ "View north-oriented" or "View direction of travel" ▷ "Display destination": map section around the destination is displayed. With Professional navigation system: entering address in a command 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. ›Destination input‹ 3. Wait for the system prompt. ▷ "Display current location": the map section around the current location is displayed. 4. Say the address aloud in the sequence sug‐ gested. ▷ "Search for points of int.": search for points of interest is started. 5. Continue input as specified by the system. Destination input by voice control If required, say each part of the address sepa‐ rately, for example town/city. Entering name of town/city on its own General ▷ Instructions for the voice control system, see page 21. The place name can be spoken as a word or spelled out. When the destination input menu is displayed: ▷ A changeover between voice operation and iDrive is possible when entering destina‐ tions using spoken commands. 1. ▷ Have possible voice commands read aloud: ›Voice commands‹ 2. ›City‹ or ›Spell name of city‹. Voice commands 4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least the first three letters. ▷ With Professional navigation system: town, street and house number can be entered with a single command. ▷ Countries, locations, roads and junctions can be spoken as whole words in the lan‐ guage of the system, see page 81, or spelled out. Example: to enter a town/city within Ger‐ many as an entire word, the language of the system must be German. ▷ Spell out the input if the language spoken and the language of the system differ. ▷ Pronounce letters fluently and avoid exces‐ sive intonation and pauses. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city. Depending on the input, up to 20 towns/cit‐ ies are suggested. 5. Select the town/city. ▷ Selecting the suggested town/ city: ›Yes‹ ▷ Selecting a different town/city: ›New entry‹ ▷ Select an entry, ›Entry ...‹, for example entry 2 ▷ Spell the input: ›Spell name of city‹ 6. Continue input as specified by the system. If there are several places with the same name: ▷ The options for input depend on the specific navigation data, country and language set‐ tings. 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Navigation Where applicable, places that sound the same are shown in a list and displayed as a place fol‐ lowed by three dots. 7. Enter an intermediate destination. 1. Select the entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹ e.g. En‐ try 2. Entering a trip destination 2. Select the desired location. Entering street or junction on its own Enter the street or junction in the same way as the town/city. Entering house number on its own Depending on the data present in the navigation system, house numbers up to 2000 can be en‐ tered. 1. ›Building number‹ 2. Say the house number. 3. Continue input as specified by the system. Planning trip with intermediate destinations New trip A trip can be planned using intermediate desti‐ nations. 1. "Navigation" 8. "Start guidance" For one trip, a maximum of 30 intermediate des‐ tinations can be entered. 1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the mode of destination entry. 3. Enter an intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination" The intermediate destination is added to the destinations list and is highlighted. 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate stop appears at the desired location in the list. 6. Press the controller. Starting the trip 1. Highlight the first destination after entering all intermediate destinations. If, for example, the second intermediate destination is the one highlighted when you start route guidance, the first intermediate destination is skipped. 2. "Start guidance" symbol indicates the active stage of the trip. 2. "Map" 3. If necessary, tilt the controller to the left. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the mode of destination entry. With Professional navigation system: save trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips so that new trips can be saved. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Save journey" 3. Enter names. 4. "OK" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 155 Navigation Navigation system With Professional navigation system: select stored trips With Professional navigations system: importing trips using USB media 1. "Navigation" 1. Switch on ignition. 2. "Saved journeys" 3. Select trip. 2. Insert a USB medium into the USB interface, see page 127, in the glove box. 4. "Start guidance" 3. "Navigation" 4. "Saved journeys" Reversing the trip direction 5. "Import journeys" The intermediate destinations are shown in the list in reverse order. 6. "USB" 1. "Map" The maximum number of trips that can be saved on the USB medium and in the navigation sys‐ tem together is 30, otherwise import is not pos‐ sible. 2. "Guidance" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Reverse stage dest. order" Options for the intermediate destinations 1. "Map" 2. 7. "OK" With Professional navigation system: importing trips through BMW Online 1. "Navigation" 2. "Saved journeys" "Guidance" 3. "Display all stage dest." 4. Select an intermediate destination. ▷ "Edit destination" ▷ "Reposition stage dest.": move the in‐ termediate destination in the list. 3. "Import journeys" 4. "BMW Online" With Professional navigation system: calling up last trip 1. "Navigation" ▷ "Delete stage destination" 2. "Saved journeys" ▷ "Go to the next stage dest." 3. "Last journey" Some options are not possible for some trips. 4. "Start guidance" With Professional navigation system: deleting stored trips With Professional navigation system: Guided Tour 1. "Saved journeys" 2. Highlight the desired trip. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete all journeys" or "Delete journey" General Recommended routes can be added to the route guidance, for example a holiday route. Start Guided Tour 1. "Navigation" 2. "Saved journeys" 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system 3. "Guided Tour search" Navigation Ending route guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" "Guidance" 3. 4. "Stop guidance" Continuing route guidance If you did not reach your destination during the last journey, route guidance may be continued. 4. Select "Country" and "Region" or search criteria: ▷ "Search for name" ▷ "Search for nearest Tour" 5. If applicable, "Start search" 6. Select a guided tour. 7. "Start guidance" 8. "Start guidance" End Guided Tour 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance" Route guidance Starting route guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Enter destination, see page 148. "Resume guidance" Route criteria General ▷ You can influence the route that is calcula‐ ted by selecting various criteria. ▷ You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination input or during route guidance. ▷ Road types form part of the navigation data and are taken into account in route planning, for example avoid motorways. ▷ The suggested route can differ from your personal experience. ▷ The settings are saved for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. ▷ With Professional navigation system: for Guided Tour the route criteria cannot be changed. ▷ Route guidance with traffic information, see page 163. 3. "Accept destination" Altering route criteria 4. "Start guidance" 1. "Navigation" ▷ The route is displayed on the control display. 2. "Map" ▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐ ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐ rival are shown in the map view. 3. ▷ Arrow view is displayed in the instrument cluster and control display as appropriate. "Route criteria" 4. Select a criterion: ▷ "Fast route": time-optimised route resulting from a combination of a route as short as feasible and fast roads. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 157 Navigation ▷ ▷ Navigation system "ECO PRO route": optimised com‐ bination of the fastest and shortest route. Arrow view "Short route": short route, without regard to time. ▷ Large arrow: current direction of travel. ▷ "Alternative routes": alternative routes are suggested if possible when route guidance is active. With Professional navigation system: the individual suggestions are marked in colour. The following information is displayed during route guidance: ▷ Road name of the road you are currently travelling along. ▷ Small arrow: indicator for next change of di‐ rection. ▷ Junction view. ▷ Driving lane information. ▷ Traffic information. ▷ Distance to the next change of direction. ▷ Street name during the next change of di‐ rection. Driving lane information In arrow view, a triangle indicates the recom‐ mended lane on a multilane carriageway. 5. To select supplementary route criteria, if necessary: ▷ "Avoid motorways": motorways are avoided as far as possible. ▷ "Avoid toll roads": routes with tolls are avoided as far as possible. ▷ "Avoid pre-paid roads": routes with long-term tolls are avoided as far as pos‐ sible. ▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided as far as possible. ▷ Solid triangle: optimal driving lane. ▷ Hollow triangle: other lane, acceptable at the moment. But a lane change might soon be necessary. Display list of routine sections With active route planning, a list of the route sections can be displayed. For each route stage, the distance to be driven and the traffic infor‐ mation are displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route profile" 3. Mark route section. Course of route Various views of the course of the route are available during route guidance: ▷ Arrow display in the instrument cluster and on the control display. ▷ List of routine sections. ▷ Map view, see page 159. With Professional navigation system: the section of the route is shown in the split screen. Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route stage. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route profile" 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system 3. "Create new route for" 6. Navigation Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": route guidance to the service station you selected is started. "Add as another destination": the service station is added to the course of the route. Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 4. Turn the controller. Enter the distance within which you want to return to the origi‐ nal route. 5. Press the controller. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" "Spoken instructions" 3. Repeating spoken instructions Cancelling a bypass 1. "Navigation" In case you no longer wish to bypass this section of the route: 2. "Map" 1. "Navigation" 4. Press the controller twice. 2. "Route profile" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Cancel new route" Refuelling recommendation The remaining range is calculated and, as nee‐ ded, service stations along the way are dis‐ played. Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information on individual service stations may have changed, for example, service stations may not be in operation. 1. "Navigation" 3. Highlight the symbol. Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume knob during the voice instruc‐ tions until the desired volume is obtained. Saving voice instructions to favourites buttons The function Enable/disable voice instructions can be saved to a favourites button, see page 19, for quick access. Map view Displaying map view 2. "Route profile" 3. "Recommended refuel" A list of service stations is displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 4. Highlight the service station. With Professional navigation system: the position of the service station is shown in the split screen. 5. Select the service station. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 159 Navigation Navigation system Overview Status fields Display/hide: press the controller. ▷ Upper status field: time, telephone and en‐ tertainment details. ▷ Lower status field: symbol for active route guidance, status of traffic information, arrival time and distance to destination. Function bar The following functions are available using the function bar: 1 Function bar 2 Route stage with traffic obstruction 3 Road sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field Symbol Function Start/stop route guidance. Switch spoken instructions on/ off. Change route criteria. Search for point of interest. Lines on the map Displaying traffic information Roads and streets are displayed in various col‐ ours and lines in accordance with their classifi‐ cation. Dotted lines denote train and ferry con‐ nections. National borders are denoted by thin lines. Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route denote route stages with traffic obstructions, depend‐ ing on the map scale. The direction in which the triangle is pointing shows the direction of the obstruction. Road signs classify the obstructions. ▷ Red road sign: the obstruction affects the planned route or direction of travel. ▷ Grey road sign: the obstruction does not af‐ fect the planned route or direction of travel. Traffic information, see page 162. Interactive map. Set map view. Changes the scale. To switch to the toolbar, tilt the controller to the left. Changing map section "Interactive map" ▷ To move the map: tilt the controller in the corresponding direction. ▷ To move the map diagonally: tilt the control‐ ler in the corresponding direction and turn it. Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller. Planned route After starting route guidance, the planned route is shown on the map. 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Automatically set scale In the north-facing map view, turn the controller in any direction until the scale shows AUTO. The map shows the entire distance between the lo‐ cation and destination. Settings for map view The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. The information is updated when starting or continuing route guidance or when chang‐ ing the destination. The symbols are displayed in specific se‐ lected scales. With business navigation system: arrow view The map is displayed on the control display. 1. "Navigation" 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Map" 2. "Arrow view on map" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Settings" Set map view. ▷ "Day/night mode" Navigation The arrow view is shown on the map. With business navigation system: position display Selecting by light ratios and making set‐ tings. The current position is displayed on the Control Display as coordinate data or, if possible, with town and street. "Traffic situation/grey map" Active: setting is not taken into account. 1. Call up "Options". ▷ With navigation system Professio‐ nal:"Satellite images" Depending on the availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed in scales of 2 km to 1000 km, approx. 1 mile to 600 miles. ▷ With navigation system Professio‐ nal:"Perspective view in 3D" Distinctive locations in the navigation data are shown on the map in 3D. ▷ "Traffic situation/grey map" The map is optimised to the display of traffic information, see page 162. Symbols of points of interest are no longer displayed. ▷ With navigation system Professio‐ nal:"Weather" Weather symbols are displayed on the map when route guidance is active. Displayed symbols: clear skies, overcast skies, rain, thunderstorms and snow, with the highest and lowest temperatures in each case. 2. "Current position" Position is displayed. With Professional navigation system: map view for split screen Regardless of the main screen, the map view can be selected for the split-screen. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Split screen" 3. Tilt the controller repeatedly to the right until the split screen is selected. 4. Select "Split screen display" or scale. 5. Select map view. ▷ "Arrow view" ▷ "Map north-oriented" ▷ "Map indicating dir. of travel" ▷ "Map perspective" ▷ "Position" ▷ "3D exit roads": selected exits are dis‐ played three-dimensionally. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 161 Navigation Navigation system ▷ "Traffic situation/grey map" 6. To change the scale: switch to split screen and turn controller. With Professional navigation system: displaying photos for destination Photos can be displayed for certain destinations when route guidance is active. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Pictures at destination" 5. Depending on the offering, various photos can be selected. Traffic information Overview General ▷ Allows traffic information from radio stations to be displayed that is transmitted by the Traffic Message Channel, TMC, of a traffic warning service. Information on traffic ob‐ structions and dangers is continuously up‐ dated. In countries in which BMW Assist does not transmit any traffic information, the traffic infor‐ mation of the radio station will continue to be displayed. Wih the traffic information from BMW Assist traffic disruptions can be located more pre‐ cisely. In addition, for example on routes which a clear with a radius of approximately 100 km, approx. 60 miles, are displayed more precisely around the current position. The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns yellow, if the traffic information con‐ cerns the calculated route and the expected de‐ lay is less than 20 minutes. The symbol turns red if the expected delay is more than 20 minutes or the route is blocked. "Traffic situation/grey map": information on traf‐ fic flow, for example, traffic jam or queuing traf‐ fic, are only shown in this setting of the map view, see page 163. The preview map in the list of the traffic information also shows this setting. Switching reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Receive traffic info" Calling up the list of traffic information ▷ Traffic information is displayed on the map by symbols. 1. "Navigation" ▷ Traffic information for the vicinity is stored in a list. 3. The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if traffic information affects the calculated route. Traffic information via BMW Assist In several countries, BMW Assist realtime traffic information, RTTI, is transmitted. With a valid BMW Assist contract, instead of the traffic information of the radio station, the traf‐ fice information of BMW Assist is displayed. 162 2. "Map" "Traffic information" The traffic information affecting the compu‐ ted route is shown first. The various items of traffic information are sorted by distance from the vehicle's current position. With traffic information from BMW Assist at the start of the list, information on diversions is also displayed. 4. Select the item of traffic information. "More information": displays further in‐ formation. 5. If applicable, browse to the next or the pre‐ ceding item of traffic information. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system Traffic information in the map Navigation 4. "Traffic info categories" 5. Select the desired categories. General "Traffic situation/grey map" Active: indications on the Control Display are toggled to grey-scale. This facilitates optimum traffic information dis‐ play. Day/night mode is not taken into consid‐ eration for this setting. Symbols or points of in‐ terest are not displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic situation/grey map" Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and location of the traffic obstruction in relation to the route, the symbols for traffic obstructions are dis‐ played. Additional information in the map view Depending on the scale, the length, direction and effect of a traffic obstruction are indicated by road signs in the map or bars along the cal‐ culated route. ▷ Red: traffic jam. ▷ Orange: queuing traffic. ▷ Yellow: heavy traffic. ▷ Green: free-flowing traffic. ▷ Grey: general traffic information, for exam‐ ple roadworks. The information displayed depend on the spe‐ cific traffic information service. Traffic information in the selected category is displayed on the map. ▷ Traffic information affecting the route ahead are always shown. ▷ For the sake of safety, traffic information re‐ lating to potential hazards (vehicle driving in wrong direction on motorway, for example) cannot be hidden. "Traffic flow": with traffic information from BMW Assist this category is not considered. Route guidance with traffic information General Diversion suggestions from the navigation sys‐ tem may be taken manually with partially dy‐ namic route guidance. With dynamic route guid‐ ance they are recorded automatically in the route guidance. Partially dynamic route guidance Partially dynamic route guidance is active when traffic information reception is switched on. Select the traffic information you want displayed on the map. The systems takes into account the existing traffic information during the route guidance. A message is displayed depending on the route, the traffic information and the possible diversion routes. If there is a traffic obstruction, a diversion is offered if possible. 1. "Navigation" The upper part of the message shows: 2. "Map" ▷ Symbol of the first traffic disruption, or with distance to the start of the traffic disruption. Filtering traffic information 3. Call up "Options". Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 163 Navigation Navigation system ▷ Total length of traffic disruptions on the route. Activating dynamic route guidance ▷ Extension of driving time due to traffic dis‐ ruptions. 2. Call up "Options". The lower part of the message shows: 1. "Navigation" 3. "Dynamic guidance" ▷ Diversion recommendation with distance to start of diversion. With Professional navigation system: country information on BMW Online ▷ Difference in route length compared with original route. Specific information on countries can be trans‐ ferred via BMW Online, see page 224, for ex‐ ample speed limits on B roads. ▷ Time saved by the diversion compared with the original route with traffic disruptions. 1. "Navigation" In Professional navigation system: in the split screen, in addition to the original route, shown in white, the diversion is also shown. 2. Call up "Options". Accepting a diversion Navigation data "Detour" For particular dangers, for example objects on the road, a message is displayed with no diver‐ sion option. Diversions can also be accepted if the traffic messages are called up using the list. 1. "Navigation" "Traffic information" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour" Dynamic route guidance The route is automatically changed if a traffic obstruction is encountered. ▷ The system does not indicate traffic ob‐ structions on the original route. ▷ Traffic information is still displayed on the map. ▷ Depending on the type of road and the na‐ ture and length of the traffic congestion, it is also possible that the route is calculated so that it cuts across the traffic congestion. ▷ Particular dangers are displayed independ‐ ently of the setting. 164 Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Navigation system version" Information re‐ garding the version of the data is displayed. Updating navigation data 2. "Map" 3. 3. "Country info (BMW Online)" General Navigation data is saved in the vehicle and can be updated. You can obtain up-to-date navigation data and the activation code from your Service centre. ▷ Depending on the volume of data, updating the data can take several hours. ▷ Update while the vehicle is in motion, to save the battery. ▷ Only the basic functions of the navigation system are available while an update is in progress. ▷ You can check the status of the update proc‐ ess. ▷ After updating, the system reboots. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Navigation system ▷ Remove the media with navigation data after updating. Professional navigation system: updating 1. Insert navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labelled side upwards. 2. Follow the instructions on the control dis‐ play. 3. Enter activation code for the navigation DVD. 4. Change the DVD as needed. After interrupting the journey, follow the instruc‐ tions on the control display. Business navigation system: updating 1. Insert a USB medium with navigation data into the USB interface in the glove box. 2. Follow the instructions on the control dis‐ play. 3. Enter the activation code of the USB me‐ dium with navigation data. 4. Drive off. After driving away, the system restarts and up‐ dates the navigation data while the vehicle is in motion. The update resumes automatically in the back‐ ground when you continue your journey. Navigation ▷ A destination without a street is not trans‐ ferred to the route guidance system. No city centre can be determined for the place entered. Enter any street in the place selected and start route guidance. ▷ A destination is not transferred to the route guidance system. The data for the destination is not available in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one. ▷ Letters cannot be selected for destination input. The data stored do not contain the destina‐ tion data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one. ▷ Map view shown in grey scales? "Traffic situation/grey map" Active: indica‐ tions on the Control Display are toggled to grey-scale. This facilitates optimum traffic information display. ▷ Spoken instructions cease to be given im‐ mediately before junctions during route guidance? Area is not fully recorded, or you have devi‐ ated from the suggested route and the sys‐ tem requires a few seconds to calculate a new route. Checking status 1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation update" What to do if... ▷ The current position cannot be displayed. The car is in an area not covered by the data, is in a poor reception area or the system is currently calculating the position. Reception will normally be possible outdoors. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Entertainment This chapter ensures your enjoyment when receiving radio and television stations or when playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Entertainment Sound Sound Vehicle Equipment 3. Select the desired sound setting. This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. General The sound settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. 4. Adjusting: turn the controller. 5. Saving: press the controller. Treble, bass, balance, fader Volume ▷ "Treble": treble adjustment. ▷ "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume depending on speed ▷ "Bass": bass adjustment. ▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution. ▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution. Setting the treble, bass, balance and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" ▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC sound signal rel‐ ative to the sound output from the enter‐ tainment system. ▷ "Gong": volume of the sound signal, for ex‐ ample for seat belt reminder, in relation to the sound output from the entertainment system. ▷ "Microphone": microphone volume during a telephone call. ▷ "Loudspeak.": loudspeaker volume during a telephone call. The following volumes are stored only for the respective connected telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.". Adjusting volumes 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Sound Entertainment 4. Select the desired volume setting. 5. Adjusting: turn the controller. 6. Saving: press the controller. Resetting the sound settings 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 169 Entertainment Radio Radio Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Control functions Muting Press the on/off button on the radio with the ig‐ nition switched on or engine running. AM/FM stations Selecting station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station. 1 Switching entertainment sources 2 On/off, volume 3 Favourite buttons or radio station buttons 4 Changing station/track 5 Ejecting CD/DVD 6 CD/DVD player 7 Not for Australia/New Zealand: Traffic re‐ ports on/off The selected station is saved for the remote control currently in use. Changing stations Press the button. For Australia/New Zealand: toggle band‐ width Saving stations 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" Sound output Switching on/off Press the on/off button on the radio when the ignition is switched off. 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Radio 3. Highlight the desired station. Entertainment 3. Select the desired station. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Rename as:" Wait until the desired name is displayed. The selected station name is in the list of current stations and the stored station is selected. RDS 4. Press and hold down the controller. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are saved for the remote control currently in use. With navigation system: The station can also be stored on the favourite buttons, see page 19. Manual station selection Station selection via frequency. 1. "Radio" RDS broadcasts additional information in the FM waveband, for example the station name. For a station with a number of frequencies, an automatic changeover to the frequency with the best reception quality takes place if required. Switching RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "RDS" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual search" 4. Select another band as necessary. 5. To select the frequency: turn the controller. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Regional programmes To save a station: press and hold down the con‐ troller. Certain FM stations broadcast regional pro‐ grammes at certain times of day. The following settings are possible: ▷ REG function on: Rename station Recommended setting. A station with changing station names can be renamed. The set regional programme is retained for as long as possible. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 171 Entertainment Radio Reception quality may deteriorate when you go beyond its transmission area. If there is poor reception quality for a longer period, there is a switch to a regional programme with better reception. ▷ REG function off: When you leave the transmission area for the regional station that is tuned, the radio changes over to a new regional station if available. When in an area with at least two regional stations, the radio may switch between the stations. If this happens, switch on the REG function. Cancelling the station search Call up any saved station via: ▷ Favourites buttons. ▷ "Saved stations" Selecting station 1. "Radio" 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. Where applicable, select "All ensembles" or the desired ensemble. Switching REG function on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "REG" The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 4. Select the desired station. Digital radio DAB, DAB/DMB Principle Digital stations are bundled into what are known as bouquets. Some stations feature additional programmes. Sports stations, for example, may broadcast various sports events at the same time. Changing stations Press the button. Station search The list of receivable stations will not be updated automatically. To perform an update, start the station search manually. 1. "Radio" Changing the ensemble It is only possible to change the ensemble if the following has been selected: "All ensembles". Press and hold down the button. 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. If applicable, "All ensembles" 4. "Station search" 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Radio Saving stations Entertainment Automatic DAB/FM changeover 1. "Radio" General 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. Select the desired station. Does not work when equipped with rear enter‐ tainment. With DAB/FM changeover activated, the radio automatically switches to a new station when the previous one can no longer be received. First of all, a search is run for the station in an‐ other ensemble. If it is not available in another ensemble, the station's analogue frequency is searched for. 4. Press the controller again. 5. Select the desired memory location. Automatic changeover is only possible if the corresponding station's signal is available in ad‐ equate quality and the IDs of the stations match. The stations are saved for the remote control currently in use. Enabling automatic DAB/FM changeover With navigation system: The station can also be stored on the favourite buttons, see page 19. 1. "Radio" Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information in text form. 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Autom. DAB/FM changeover" 1. "Radio" 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Station information" Symbol beside the station name indicates that a digital station is being played as analogue. Symbol beside the station name indicates that a digital station is being played as digital in another ensemble. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Additional programmes Symbol indicates that a selected station con‐ tains additional programmes. Sports stations, Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 173 Entertainment Radio for example, may broadcast various sports events at the same time. Without navigation system and telephone: On radio station buttons 1. "Radio" 1. Select the desired station. 2. "DAB/DMB" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Press the controller. 5. Select the additional station. Saved stations 2. Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds. To call up a stored station, briefly pressure the corresponding button. Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Saved stations" General Forty stations can be saved. Calling up a station 3. Select the desired station. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete entry" 1. "Radio" 2. "Saved stations" 3. Select the desired station. Traffic reports Display in the status field Saving stations The currently selected station is saved. ▷ TP white: traffic radio switched on, traffic radio station available. 2. "Saved stations" ▷ TP grey: traffic radio switched on, no traffic radio station available. 3. "Save station" ▷ No display: Traffic Program is switched off. 1. "Radio" Switching Traffic Program on/off Press the button. The traffic report station with the stron‐ gest reception is chosen. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 4. Select the desired memory location. The list of saved stations is saved for the remote control currently in use. With navigation system and telephone: The sta‐ tions can also be stored on the favourite but‐ tons, see page 19. 174 Interrupting a traffic report Press one of the following buttons during a traf‐ fic radio report: ▷ ▷ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Radio Entertainment Adjusting the volume Turn the volume knob during a traffic report until the desired volume is obtained. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 175 Entertainment CD/multimedia CD/multimedia Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Control functions Muting Press the on/off button on the radio with the ig‐ nition switched on or engine running. CD/ DVD Playback Inserting a CD/ DVD Insert the CD/DVD with the label side upper‐ most. The disk begins to play automatically. It may take a few minutes to read compressed audio files. Starting play A CD/DVD is in the CD/DVD player or the DVD changer. 1 Switching entertainment sources 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2 On/off, volume 2. "CD/DVD" 3 Favourite buttons or radio station buttons 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4 Changing station/track 5 Ejecting CD/DVD 6 CD/DVD player 7 Not for Australia/New Zealand: Traffic re‐ ports on/off For Australia/New Zealand: toggle band‐ width Sound output Symbol CD/DVD player Switching on/off Press the on/off button on the radio when the ignition is switched off. 176 Meaning ... DVD changer Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia Formats that can be played ▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD-Audio (only video system), DVDVideo. Entertainment To change to a higher-level directory: tilt the controller to the left. ▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA. ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A. Remove the CD/DVD 1. Press the button. 2. Select the desired track to start playback. The CD/DVD is pushed out slightly. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. Playing audio tracks Selecting a track using button Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired track is played. Selecting a track using the iDrive Displaying track information Audio CDs Select the desired track to start playback. If information is saved for a track, this is dis‐ played automatically: ▷ Artist. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files ▷ Album title. Depending on the data, it might occur that not all characters on the CD/DVD are displayed cor‐ rectly. ▷ File name of the track. 1. Select the directory as appropriate. ▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 177 Entertainment CD/multimedia 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Random" 2 mph. In some countries, it is only shown with the parking brake engaged or in gear position P. DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a DVD with video content. "DVD menu" 4. All the tracks on the CD/DVD are played in ran‐ dom order. Fast forward/rewind Keep button pressed. VCD/SVCD Video playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" Country codes Only DVDs with the code of your home region can be played. See also the information on your DVD. 3. Select a CD/DVD with video content. 4. "Select track" 5. Select the desired title. Code Region Video menu 1 USA, Canada 2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ rica To open the Video menu: turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 3 South-East Asia 4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand Calls up the DVD menu. 5 North-West Asia, North Africa Pause 6 China Stop 0 All regions Next chapter If "Back" is displayed, press the controller. Symbol Function Starts playback. Previous chapter Playback The video image is shown on the front control display up to a speed of approximately 3 km/h, 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia Symbol Function Fast forward Rewind For fast forward/rewind: each time the controller is pressed, the speed increases. To stop, start playback. Entertainment Selecting subtitles The available subtitles depend on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles". DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to call up the Video menu. 2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ pends on the contents of the DVD. 3. To select menu items: tilt and press the con‐ troller. To change to the Video menu: turn and press the controller. Setting the brightness, contrast, colour Settings for DVD/VCD 2. Call up "Options". For some DVDs, settings are only possible via the DVD menu, see also information on your DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 3. "Display settings" 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Colour" Selecting language The languages available depend on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Audio/language" 5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller. Selecting zoom Display video picture over full screen. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 4. Select the desired language. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 179 Entertainment CD/multimedia DVD changer 3. "Other options" 4. "Zoom mode" Inside the boot DVD video: The DVD changer is located behind the left side trim in the boot. 1. With the DVD menu displayed, turn the con‐ troller. Control functions and displays Selecting title 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Other options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired title. VCD/SVCD: "Select track" 1. 2. Select the desired title. Select camera angle The availability of an alternative camera angle depends on the DVD and the current track on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 1 Emptying the DVD compartments 2 LED on the DVD compartment 3 Buttons for DVD compartments 4 DVD compartment 5 Filling the DVD compartments Filling the DVD compartments individually 3. "Other options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired angle of view. Calling up the main menu, Back These functions are not included on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use. 1. Press button once. The LED on the first vacant compartment flashes. 2. Select a different compartment if necessary. 3. Wait until the LEDs on the DVD compart‐ ment flash. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the centre. 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically and stored in the selected compartment. Inserting CDs/DVDs Entertainment Interrupt function Filling the DVD trays or removing the CDs/DVDs may be interrupted. Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs on the DVD compartment are flashing, otherwise the CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Press the appropriate button. Do not force the CD/DVD into the drive; it could jam and you might not be able to eject it.◀ ▷ Filling all the available DVD compartments Faults 1. Repairing the fault: Long press button once. The LEDs on the vacant compartments flash. 2. Wait until the LEDs on the DVD compart‐ ment flash and then insert a CD or DVD, making sure it is centred. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and stowed in the empty compartments. Inserting CDs/DVDs Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs on the DVD compartment are flashing, otherwise the CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not force the CD/DVD into the drive; it could jam and you might not be able to eject it.◀ It may take a few minutes to read the CDs/DVDs after loading. Removing CDs/DVDs individually 1. Press button once. 2. Select the DVD compartment. The CD/DVD is pushed out slightly. 3. Remove the CD/DVD. Removing all CDs/DVDs 1. Long press button once. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs. ▷ If the LEDs on the DVD slot and the LEDs on the DVD trays flash rapidly, there is a fault. 1. Press one of the following buttons: ▷ ▷ The last CD/DVD inserted is pushed out slightly. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. When the LEDs are no longer flashing quickly, the DVD changer is operational again. Playing audio tracks The audio track of a DVD can be played even if video playback is not possible in the vehicle. Only the main film is played, without intro or ex‐ tras. Starting play There is a DVD in the DVD changer. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. Selecting a chapter using the button Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired chapter is played. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 181 Entertainment CD/multimedia Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter. adapter could jam and be impossible to eject. ▷ Do not use combined CD/DVDs, for example DVD Plus, as otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impossible to eject.◀ General malfunctions Fast forward/rewind Keep button pressed. Selecting language The languages available depend on the DVD. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" ▷ The CD/DVD players and changers have been optimised for operation in your vehicle. In some instances, they may be more sen‐ sitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than devices for stationary use. ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played back, first check whether it has been inserted cor‐ rectly. 3. Select the desired DVD. Atmospheric humidity 4. Call up "Options". The CD/DVD or the focussing lens can carry condensation due to high humidity and playback may temporarily not be possible. 5. "Audio/language" 6. Select the desired language. Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs Notes CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover If malfunctions occur only with individual CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following: Self-recorded CDs/DVDs All BMW CD/DVD players and changers are Class 1 laser products. Do not operate when the cover is damaged, otherwise it could cause severe eye injuries.◀ ▷ With self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible causes include inconsistent data-creation or burning process, low quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank. CDs and DVDs ▷ Only write on the upper side of CDs/DVDs using a special marker pen. Using CDs/DVDs ▷ Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subse‐ quently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the tempera‐ tures to which these media are ex‐ posed during playing. This could dam‐ age the system irreparably. Damage ▷ Avoid causing fingerprints and protect against dust, scratches and moisture. ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a case. ▷ Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 50 ℃/122 ℉, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight. ▷ Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm, 5 in and do not use CDs/ DVDs in conjunction with adapters, for ex‐ ample CD singles. Otherwise the CDs or the 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia CDs/DVDs with copy protection leted later individually, Delete tracks and di‐ rectory, see page 187. CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs being impossible to play, or only being playable with restrictions. MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology based on a number of registered US patents and intellectual property of the Macrovision Corpo‐ ration and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovi‐ sion. Media with the corresponding protection – unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision – may only be shown privately. It is prohibited to copy this technology. DTS Digital Surround™ Manufactured under licence of US pat‐ ent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents issued and applied for in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All rights reserved. Entertainment Tracks with copy protection, DRM, are saved, but cannot be played. Backing up music data Back up music data regularly, as otherwise it could be lost in the event of a fault in the hard disk.◀ Music recognition technology and re‐ lated data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐ ognition technology and related content deliv‐ ery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐ ing. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Saving from CD/DVD Music collection 1. Insert a CD or DVD in the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" Music memory 3. "CD/DVD" General 5. "Save in car" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. Tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB media can be saved in the music collection on a hard disk in the vehicle and played from there. ▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐ pressed audio format. Information on the al‐ bum, for example artist, is saved, if applica‐ ble. ▷ CD/DVD or USB medium with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or USB medium is saved as an album in the vehicle. WMA, MP3, M4A and AAC formats are saved. Tracks and directories can be de‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 183 Entertainment CD/multimedia The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played. The tracks are played in the normal order during saving. During saving, bear the following in mind: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD from the CD/DVD player, as oth‐ erwise saving is interrupted. It is possible to change over to the other audio sources without interrupting saving. Tracks of the current CD/ DVD that have already been saved can also be called up. Interrupting saving 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. "Saving..." To update the database, contact your Service centre. If the titles do not stored any information, the entire album information, see page 187, of the CD may be updated using BMW Online. Saving from a USB medium To save music, a suitable medium must be con‐ nected to the USB interface in the glove box. ▷ Suitable media: USB mass storage facilities, for example USB memory sticks or MP3 players with USB interface. ▷ Unsuitable media: USB hard disks, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with a number of bays, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from an Apple iPod/iPhone can be played using the USB audio interface in the centre armrest. ▷ File systems: current file systems for USB devices are supported. FAT 32 format is recommended. 1. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter‐ face in the glove box, see page 127. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. "Cancel saving" 4. Call up "Options". The saving process is interrupted and can be continued at any time. 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)" Resuming saving 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue saving" CD/DVD saving is continued at the start of the track for which saving was interrupted. Information on the album During the saving process, the information, for example the name of the artist, is saved for the tracks if this information is available in the data‐ base in the vehicle or on the CD. 184 Playing music Music search All tracks for which information is saved can be called up via music search. All tracks for which Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia no information is saved can be called up via the corresponding album, see page 186. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search" Entertainment Music search using voice control Instructions for the voice control system, see page 21. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. ›Music search‹ 3. Call up the desired category, for exam‐ ple ›Select artist‹. 4. Say the desired entry from the list. 5. Select further categories as appropriate. Selecting the track directly: ›Title ...‹. 4. Select the desired category. Say the spoken command and the name of the desired track together in one command. Currently playing List of tracks last generated by a music search, or the last album selected. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback" 5. Select the desired entry: ▷ Select "A-Z search", see page 20, and make the desired entry. ▷ Select the desired entry from the list. 6. Select further categories as appropriate. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. To find, for example, all the tracks of a certain artist, only call up the artist. All tracks by that artist will be displayed. 7. "Start playback" The list of tracks is repeated automatically. Starting new music search "New search" 4. If applicable, select the desired track. Top 50 The 50 most played tracks. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. If applicable, select the desired track. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 185 Entertainment CD/multimedia Albums 3. Call up "Options". All saved albums, listed in the order of the date of saving. 4. "Random" Symbol Format Audio CD Compressed audio files 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album. Depending on the album, the tracks or sub‐ directories of the album are displayed. The first track will be played automatically if pos‐ sible. Managing music Albums Renaming album If applicable, the name of the album is entered automatically during saving. If the name is un‐ known it can also be changed. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Call up "Options". 4. Change directories if necessary to select a track. 5. "Rename album" To change to a higher-level directory: tilt the controller to the left. Random playback All the tracks in the selection are played in ran‐ dom order. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 6. Select the letters individually. Deleting album It may not be possible to delete an album while a track from that album is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia Entertainment 3. Highlight the desired album. Free capacity 4. Call up "Options". Display free capacity in the music collection. 5. "Delete album" 1. "CD/Multimedia" Deleting directory and track It may not be possible to delete a track while it is being played, 2. "Music collection" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Memory available" or to delete a directory while a track from that directory is being played. Music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" Backing up music collection 2. "Music collection" The entire music collection can be backed up on a USB medium. Ensure that the USB medium has adequate free capacity. 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track" Album information If no information was saved for audio CDs during saving, it can be updated later via BMW Online as required. The update takes place for each individual al‐ bum. Updating album information via BMW Online Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection can take several hours. This is why it is best to make the backup during a longer journey. 1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter‐ face in the glove box. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Call up "Options". 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Update album info online" If it was possible to save the album information, the name of the album is displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 187 Entertainment CD/multimedia 6. "Music data import/export" External devices Overview Symbol Meaning AUX-IN port USB audio interface Audio interface for mobile phone Bluetooth audio 7. "Backup music on USB" AUX-IN port Overview ▷ Connection of audio devices is possible, for example MP3 players. The sound output is via the vehicle loudspeakers. Saving music collection to the vehicle When music is saved from a USB medium, the existing music collection in the vehicle is re‐ placed. ▷ Recommendation: medium sound and vol‐ ume settings on the audio device. The sound might depend on the quality of the audio files. Connecting 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB" Deleting music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" AUX-IN port is in the centre console. 2. "Music collection" Connect the headphones or line-out connection of the equipment to the jack connector. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete music collection" Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If applicable, "External devices" 4. 188 "AUX front" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia Entertainment The sound is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐ ers. of the music player in the mobile phone: Ap‐ ple iPhone or mobile phones. Volume control Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the AUX-IN port. The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs significantly from other audio sources, it makes sense to bal‐ ance the volumes. Due to the large variety of the audio devices available on the market, operation using the ve‐ hicle cannot be ensured for every audio device/ mobile phone. Adjust volume Ask at your Service centre regarding suitable audio devices/mobile phones. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If applicable, "External devices" 3. "AUX front" Audio files Playback of common audio files is possible: ▷ MP3. 4. "Volume" ▷ WMA. ▷ WAV (PCM). ▷ AAC, M4A. ▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS. File systems Current file systems for USB devices are sup‐ ported. FAT 32 format is recommended. 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume setting is reached and press the controller. Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface USB audio interface /mobile phone audio interface Overview External audio devices can be connected, Op‐ eration is done using the iDrive. The sound out‐ put is via the vehicle loudspeakers. Connection options for external devices ▷ Connection is via USB audio interface: Ap‐ ple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, for example MP3 player, USB memory sticks or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface. The USB audio interface is in the centre armrest. For the connection, use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available from the Service centre, or a flexible adapter ca‐ ble. ▷ Connection is via snap-in adapter if your ve‐ hicle is equipped with extended connectivity Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 189 Entertainment CD/multimedia Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the AUX-IN port and USB in‐ terface using the special cable adapter or to the USB interface using the flexible adapter cable. The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is supported by the USB audio interface. information from existing tracks will be deleted if required. Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ agement (DRM) cannot be played. Playback Connection of USB device via USB audio interface 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. The USB audio interface is in the centre armrest. Connect using the flexible adapter cable. This protects the USB interface and your USB device against mechanical damage. Connect the USB device to the USB interface. Playing starts with the first track. In the split-screen view, split-screen, after a few seconds, the CD cover belonging to the title is displayed. Searching for tracks Options via: ▷ Playlists After connecting for the first time Information on all titles, e.g. interpretation on type of music, as well as the playback lists are transferred to the vehicle. This might take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory. ▷ Information: type of music, interpretation, if necessary composer, album, track. ▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory, composer if necessary. The titles are displayed if they have been cre‐ ated with Roman letters. Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" Number of tracks 2. "External devices" Information on up to four USB devices or for ap‐ proximately 16000 or 36000 titles can be stored in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or more than 16000 or 36000 tracks are saved, the 3. Select the 190 4. or symbol. "Search" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia 5. Select the desired category, for example "Genre" or "Artist". All entries are shown in a list. ▷ Call up "A-Z search" and make the de‐ sired entry. When you enter a character, a filter is run on the basis of this charac‐ ter as the first letter. When you enter several characters, all the results that contain this character string are dis‐ played. ▷ Select the desired entry from the list. Entertainment Currently playing List of currently played tracks. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the 4. or symbol. "Current playback" Random playback The current list of tracks is played in random or‐ der. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Random" Fast forward/rewind Keep button pressed. 6. Select further categories as appropriate. Not all categories need to be selected. If, for example, all the tracks of a certain artist are to be displayed, it is sufficient to call up only this artist. All tracks by that artist will be dis‐ played. Video playback Overview 7. "Start playback" Video playback possible through snap-in adapter. Operation is done using the iDrive. The sound output is via the vehicle loudspeakers. Starting a new track search Playback "New search" The video image is shown on the front control display up to a speed of approximately 3 km/h, 2 mph. In some countries, it is only shown with the parking brake engaged or in gear position P. Playlists Calling up playlists. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the 4. or "Playlists" symbol. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Video" 5. Select the directory as appropriate. To change to a higher-level directory: tilt the controller to the left. 6. Select the desired video file to start play‐ back. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 191 Entertainment CD/multimedia ▷ The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If applicable, change volume set‐ tings on the device. Video menu Symbol Function Next video file ▷ Up to four external devices can be registered with the vehicle. Previous video file Select symbol twice to play back the previous video file. Requirements ▷ Suitable device. Visit www.bmw.com/blue‐ tooth for more information. Notes ▷ Device ready for operation. Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐ vironmental conditions, for example very high temperatures, see the operating instructions of the audio device. ▷ Ignition switched on. Depending on the format of the audio files per‐ fect playback cannot be ensured in every case; for example bit rates higher than 256 Kbit/s. Notes on connecting ▷ The connected audio device is supplied with a maximum of 500 mA if the device supports this. Do not, therefore, also connect the de‐ vice to a socket in the vehicle as otherwise perfect playback cannot be guaranteed. ▷ Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB in‐ terface. ▷ Do not connect any devices such as fans or lights to the USB audio interface. ▷ Do not connect up USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB audio interface for charging external devices. ▷ Bluetooth in the vehicle, see page 201, and device activated. ▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the device, for example connect without confir‐ mation or visibility, see Owner's Handbook of the device. ▷ A number with a minimum of 4 and a maxi‐ mum 16 positions is specified as the Blue‐ tooth passkey. Only required for non-recur‐ ring registration. Connecting Connecting the device Only connect the device when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you may become dis‐ tracted and endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.◀ 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio" Bluetooth audio 4. "Add new device" Overview ▷ Playback of music files from external devi‐ ces such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth is possible. Using a mobile phone as an audio source, see page 202. ▷ The sound output is via the vehicle loud‐ speakers. 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ played. Entertainment 8. Select the desired functions to which the device is to be connected, for example "Audio". 9. "OK" 5. To perform other operations on the device; see the Owner’s Handbook of the device: for example finding/connecting Bluetooth de‐ vice or new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display of the device. 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the display of the device. There is a request via iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey. 7. Enter and confirm passkey. If connection was successful, the device is shown as connected. White symbol: device active as audio source. If connection was unsuccessful: What to do if..., see page 195. Connecting a certain device An already connected device can be connected as an active audio source. Connection not possible if data is exchanged using a mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth. Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of connected devices. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio" 4. Select desired device from list of registered devices. 5. Call up "Options". 6. "Configure device" 7. "Audio" 8. "OK" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 193 Entertainment CD/multimedia Connecting a device Playback menu 1. "CD/Multimedia" Not all functions may be available, depending on the device. 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio" Symbol Function 4. Select desired device from list of registered devices. Next track Fast forward: keep symbol pressed. Previous title Rewind: keep symbol pressed. Searching for tracks A title search is possible depending on the de‐ vice. 1. "CD/Multimedia" White symbol: device active as audio source. 2. "External devices" 3. Playback Select the symbol. 4. "Search device content" 5. ▷ "A-Z search" General ▷ Displaying title information depends on the device. ▷ Select desired entry or directory. ▷ Can be operated using the device or iDrive. Playback programmes ▷ Playback is interrupted if data is exchanged using a mobile phone equipped with Blue‐ tooth. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" Starting play 1. Connecting a device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Select the symbol. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Select player" 3. "External devices" 4. Depending on the device, different programs for playing back the music files are available. Select the symbol. 6. Select the desired channel. Disconnecting audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Call up "Options". 5. Select the desired track from the list. 194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia 5. "Configure device" Entertainment using the snap-in adapter or the charging cable. ▷ If appropriate, only one device can be con‐ nected to the vehicle, depending on the mo‐ bile phone. De-register the device from the vehicle and only register and connect one device. ▷ Is the device no longer responding. Switch the device off and on again. ▷ Repeat the connection attempt. 6. "Audio" No music can be played back. 7. "OK" Disconnecting a device ▷ Start the program for playing back music files on the device and if necessary, select a track via the device. 1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Switch the radio off and on again. 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio" Music files are played back, but only at low vol‐ ume. 4. Highlight the device to be disconnected. ▷ Adjust the volume controls on the device. 5. Call up "Options". Playback is disrupted when a button is pressed on the device or if other messages are issued via the device. 6. "Remove device from list" What to do if... Visit www.bmw.com/bluetooth for more infor‐ mation on compatible devices. Compatible mobile phones, see page 200 Device not supported by the vehicle. ▷ If applicable, perform a software update, see page 195. Device not registered or paired. ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys for device and vehicle match. Enter the same passkey on the device and using iDrive. ▷ Duration for passkey input longer than 30 seconds. Repeat the connection at‐ tempt. ▷ Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the device or the vehicle? If necessary delete the pairing information for some other de‐ vice. ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or is the battery low? Charge the mobile phone ▷ Switch off keypad acknowledgement tones and other audio output at the device. Playback is interrupted by phone calls or traffic announcements and does not resume automat‐ ically. ▷ Switch the radio off and on again. Playback not possible if the mobile phone is connected via both Bluetooth Audio and the ex‐ tended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone option. ▷ Disconnect one of the two pairing connec‐ tions, for example disconnect audio connec‐ tion, see page 194, and restart playback. If all the points on the list have been reviewed and the desired function cannot be run, contact Hotline or Service Centre. Software update Depending on the current software, the vehicle supports different external devices. A software update may be supported, for example, by a new Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 195 Entertainment CD/multimedia mobile phone or new external devices of the ve‐ hicle. 6. If applicable, "USB" The software is updated via: 8. "OK" ▷ USB. All the updates listed are installed. Updates and related, up-to-date informa‐ tion is available on the website www.bmw.com/update. ▷ BMW TeleServices The available software can be updated di‐ rectly through the vehicle. 7. "Start update" Update software via BMW TeleServices Do not attempt to update the software unless the vehicle is at a standstill. 1. Switch on ignition. 2. "Settings" Show current version 3. "Software update" The information about the version of the soft‐ ware currently installed is displayed. 4. "Update software" 1. "Settings" 6. If applicable, "Start update" 2. "Software update" 7. "Start update" 3. "Show current version" 8. "OK" Select desired version to display additional in‐ formation. All the updates listed are installed. Update software via USB Restore previous version Do not attempt to update the software unless the vehicle is at a standstill. The software version before the last software update can be restored. 1. Store the file for the software update onto a USB data store in the main folder. Do not attempt to restore the previous version of the software unless the vehicle is at a stand‐ still. 2. Connect the USB storage device to the USB interface of the USB audio interface in the centre arm rest. Updating via the USB inter‐ face in the glove box is not possible. 3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software" 5. "BMW TeleServices" To interrupt update: "Cancel". 1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" select twice. All the updates listed are removed. Note During a software update or when restoring the previous version, BMW Services, Office func‐ tions and associated devices are not available for a short time. Wait a few minutes until availa‐ bility is restored. 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 CD/multimedia Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Entertainment 197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Communication All of the possibilities available for mobile communication with your family, friends, business partners or service providers are summarised in this chapter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Communication Telephone Telephone Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. ▷ Storage of the mobile phone. ▷ Charging of the battery. ▷ Connection to the external aerial of the ve‐ hicle. This ensures better network reception and uniform reproduction quality. Compatible mobile phones Principle Visit www.bmw.com/bluetooth for detailed in‐ formation about the mobile phones and external devices with Bluetooth interface that are sup‐ ported by the mobile phone preparation option. Mobiles or other external devices, e.g. audio player, can be connected to the vehicle by Blue‐ tooth. Viewing vehicle identification number (VIN) and software part number Overview After registering once, these devices are auto‐ matically detected when the ignition is switched on, as soon as they are in the vehicle and can be operated using iDrive, keys on the steering wheel or by voice. External devices can be used depending on functionality of the device as a telephone or as an audio source through the vehicle. The tele‐ phone functions are described below. Up to four external devices can be registered. It might be necessary to have certain functions enabled by the mobile phone or service pro‐ vider. Using the telephone while the vehicle is in motion Only make inputs when traffic activity permits. As the driver, do not make telephone calls with the mobile phone in your hand while the vehicle is in motion; use the hands-free speaking sys‐ tem. The vehicle occupants and other road users could otherwise be endangered.◀ Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter enables: 200 The vehicle identification number (VIN) and soft‐ ware part number are necessary so that you can check which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation option. You might also need details about the mobile phone's soft‐ ware version. 1. "Telephone" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Bluetooth Info" 4. "Display system information" These suitable mobile phones have a certain software version that supports the functions of the vehicle described below. Malfunctions may occur when using other mo‐ bile phones or software versions. Do not operate a connected mobile phone with the keypad of the phone to avoid malfunctions. You have the option of performing a software update. Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile can be restricted and no longer op‐ erate. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Telephone When using the mobile through the vehicle, fol‐ low the user manual of the mobile. Communication 3. "Bluetooth" Connecting/disconnecting the mobile phone General The following functions are available: ▷ Using a mobile phone as a telephone. ▷ Using a mobile phone as an additional tele‐ phone. Additional functions ▷ Using a mobile phone for data transfer. Enabling/disabling additional functions ▷ Using a mobile phone as an audio source. ▷ Using an audio device as an audio source. Requirements ▷ Suitable mobile phone. Activating the functions before the registration process in order to use them in the vehicle. In‐ formation about suitable mobile phones that support these functions, see page 200. ▷ Mobile phone operational. 1. "Telephone" ▷ Bluetooth in the vehicle and mobile phone activated. 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" ▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the mobile phone, for example connect without confirmation or visibility; see Owner’s Handbook of the device. 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 3. Call up "Options". 5. Select the desired additional function. ▷ "Additional telephone" ▷ If applicable deactivate Bluetooth audio. ▷ "Transferring data via device" ▷ A number with a minimum of 4 and a maxi‐ mum 16 positions has been specified as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required for nonrecurring registration. ▷ "Office" ▷ "Bluetooth audio" 6. "OK" ▷ Ignition switched on. As long as the additional function is deactivated, no telephone can be assigned. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth connection Additional telephone Bluetooth use is not permitted everywhere. Comply with relevant local laws. 1. "Telephone" 2. Call up "Options". A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, see page 204. Incoming calls on the additional telephone during an active call are shown on the control display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 201 Communication Telephone Data transfer A mobile phone connected as a telephone or additional telephone can be used for data trans‐ fer. The data transfer is shown in the status line. This can result is call charges, for example, with a roaming connection. The services breakdown assistance, hotline, tel‐ eservice call, automatic teleservice call, Internet and BMW Live are available. Using the services does not require a valid BMW Assist contract. The availability of the function depends on the country and is series-specific. The mobile phone must be compatible with and support the required Bluetooth radio standards, equipped with a corresponding mobile tariff and have suit‐ able Internet settings. mobile phone: for example finding/connect‐ ing Bluetooth device or new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display of the mobile phone. 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the display of the mobile phone. 6. Request using the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey. Enter and confirm passkey. Or Compare the control number in the vehicle display with the control number in the mo‐ bile phone display. Confirm the control num‐ ber in the mobile phone and on the vehicle. "OK" 7. Select the function for which you would like to use the mobile phone. End data transfer Terminating an existing data transmission im‐ mediately: 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Transferring data via device" The additional function data transfer is deacti‐ vated and can be assigned to another mobile phone. Audio source 8. "OK" If the registration was successful, the mobile phone is displayed at the top of the mobile phone list. Functions supported by the mobile phone or audio device are displayed as symbols when connecting. White symbol: function is active. Grey symbol: function is inactive. A mobile phone can be used as an audio source. Symbol Function Telephone. Connecting Connecting the mobile phone Only connect the mobile phone when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you may be‐ come distracted and endanger the vehicle oc‐ cupants and other road users.◀ 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. "Add new device" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ played. Additional telephone. Data transfer. Audio source. Four mobile phones can be connected in the vehicle at the same time. Up to three mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle at the same time. If the registration was unsuccessful: What to do if..., see page 203. 4. Perform other operations on the mobile phone, see the Owner's Handbook of the 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Telephone Communication After connecting for the first time ▷ "Additional telephone" ▷ Mobile phone is detected/paired in the ve‐ hicle after a short delay when the engine is running or the ignition switched on. ▷ "Data transfer" ▷ Phonebook entries on the telephone's SIM card or the mobile phone itself are transfer‐ red to the vehicle after it has been detected, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ Four mobile phones can be connected. ▷ "Audio" 7. "OK" If a function is assigned to a mobile phone, then this is deactivated for the already connected mobile phone and the mobile phone is logged off. ▷ For a few mobile phones, certain settings are needed, for example, authorisation or secure connection, see instruction manual of the mobile phone. Switching telephone and additional telephone Connecting a certain mobile phone 1. "Telephone" If the vehicle detects more than one mobile phone, it connects with the mobile that is high‐ est on the list. If necessary, another detected mobile phone can be connected with the vehi‐ cle. If another mobile phone is to be connected, this can be selected. 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be discon‐ nected. 3. Select the mobile phone to be connected. 4. Call up "Options". Functions assigned to the mobile phone before disconnection are reassigned to the mobile phone upon reconnection. If applicable, this function was deactivated for a previously con‐ nected mobile phone. 5. "Remove device from list" Configuring mobile phone Mobile phone not registered or paired. Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐ vated with a registered and connected mobile phone. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. Highlight mobile phone to be configured. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Configure device" 6. At least one function must be selected. ▷ "Telephone" The function of the telephone and additional tel‐ ephone can be switched automatically. 3. "Change phone/addit. phone" Disconnecting a mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" What to do if... Information about suitable mobile phones, see page 200. ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the ve‐ hicle and the mobile phone. ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys for the mobile phone and vehicle match. Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and using iDrive. ▷ Duration for passkey input longer than 30 seconds. Repeat the connection at‐ tempt. ▷ Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the mobile phone or the vehicle? If necessary Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 203 Communication Telephone delete the pairing information for some other device. ▷ Audio connection is activated. Deactivate audio connection. ▷ Mobile phone connected as audio source or additional telephone? Mobile phone must be connected as telephone. Quality of the phone connection is poor. ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or is the battery low? Charge the mobile phone using the snap-in adapter or the charging cable. ▷ Bluetooth signal strength can be adjusted on mobile phone, depends on the model. ▷ If appropriate, only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. De-register the mobile phone from the vehicle and only register and con‐ nect one mobile phone. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker separately. The mobile phone is no longer responding. ▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. ▷ Too high or low ambient temperatures? Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient conditions. Telephone functions not possible. ▷ Mobile phone registered as additional tele‐ phone and additional telephone function disabled? Enable function. ▷ Outgoing call not possible? Connect mobile phone as telephone. No phone book entries, not all entries or incom‐ plete entries are displayed. ▷ Transfer of the phone book entries has not completed. ▷ Under certain circumstances only the phone book entries saved in the mobile phone or on the SIM card are transferred. ▷ It might be that phone book entries with spe‐ cial characters cannot be displayed. ▷ Number of phone book entries to be stored is too high. ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, e.g. due to stored information such as notes? Reduce data volume of the contact. ▷ Mobile phone connected as audio source? Mobile phone must be connected as tele‐ phone. 204 ▷ Place the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or close to the centre console. If all the points on the list have been reviewed and the desired function cannot be run, contact Hotline or Service Centre. Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached. The setting is saved for the remote control currently in use. The vehicle adjusts the volume of the micro‐ phone on the telephone and the volume of the other party automatically. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to adapt the volumes. Settings are possible only during a call and must be adjusted separately for each tele‐ phone. The settings are deleted as soon as the telephone is de-registered. 1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak." 5. Adjusting: turn the controller. 6. Saving: press the controller. Incoming call Receiving a call If the number of the caller is saved in the tele‐ phone book and is transferred from the network, Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Telephone the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed. Ending a call If more than one phone number is assigned to the contact, only the name is displayed. Using iDrive Communication "Hang up" The number is only shown in the event of calls to the additional telephone, if the number is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to the additional telephone is automatically blocked if another call is active on the other telephone. Accepting a call Using iDrive Via button on the steering wheel "Accept" Press the button. Via instrument cluster "Hang up" Entering phone numbers Dialling a number Via button on the steering wheel Press the button. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol. Via instrument cluster "Accept" Rejecting a call Using iDrive "Reject" Via instrument cluster "Reject" The phone number can also be entered using the voice control system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 205 Communication Telephone Calls with a number of participants Setting up a conference General Two calls can be merged to set up a telephone conference. It is possible to switch between calls or merge two calls to set up a conference. The functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider. 1. Setting up two calls. 2. "Conference call" Accepting a call during another call On termination, both calls are always termina‐ ted. If one call is terminated by another sub‐ scriber, the other call is continued, if required. If possible, this functions must be released by the service provider and the mobile set for it. Setting the microphone to mute If there is a second call during an ongoing call you hear a call waiting signal, if applicable. The microphone can be muted during active calls. "Accept" 1. "Telephone" The call is accepted and the existing call is held. Setting up a second call 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone muted" Set up another call during a call. The mute microphone is automatically activa‐ ted: 1. "Telephone" ▷ When a new call is set up. 2. "Active calls" ▷ When alternating between call parties. 3. "Hold" The current call is held. DTMF overlap dialling Using DTMF overlap dialling to access network services or to control devices, e.g. remote an‐ swer phone access. This requires the DTMF code. 1. "Telephone" 2. Selecting a contact from a list or "Dial number". 3. 4. Dial a new phone number or select from a list. Switching between two calls, alternating Active call is displayed in colour. Call on hold is displayed in grey. "Swap calls" The phone switches to the call that is in pro‐ gress. 206 "DTMF suffix dialling" 4. Enter DTMF code via iDrive. Phone book Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and lists all contacts for which a phone number has been entered. The entries can be selected and a call set up. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Telephone A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts. Communication Redialling General The list of numbers dialled in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. The last 20 numbers dialled are displayed. The sort sequence varies from mo‐ bile phone to mobile phone. Dialling numbers via the instrument cluster Possible if no call is currently active. Call contact 1. Symbol Meaning Press key on the steering wheel. 2. Select the desired phone number. Contact with a stored telephone number. Contact with more than one stored telephone number. Call not possible, mobile phone with‐ out reception or network or Teleser‐ vice Call active. The connection is established. Dial number using iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Last number redial" For contacts with more than one stored tele‐ phone number: select the desired contact. The connection is established. For contacts with more than one stored tele‐ phone number: select the desired contact and then select the phone number. The connection is established. 3. Select the desired entry and telephone number as necessary. Editing contacts The connection is established. Changing the entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle. Deleting an individual entry or all entries 1. Highlight the contact. Deletion of entries depends on the mobile phone. 2. Call up "Options". 1. Mark entry. 3. "Edit entry" 2. Call up "Options". The contact can be edited. 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 207 Communication Telephone Saving an entry in Contacts 2. Call up "Options". 1. Mark entry. 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" Saving an entry in Contacts 1. Mark entry. 4. If necessary, select contact. 2. Call up "Options". 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others" 3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" 6. If necessary, complete the entries. 4. If necessary, select contact. 7. "Save contact" 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others" Incoming calls 6. If necessary, complete the entries. 7. "Save contact" Displaying calls The list of incoming calls on the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mo‐ bile phone. The last 20 incoming calls are dis‐ played. The sort sequence and the way in which numbers are displayed vary from mobile phone to mobile phone. Hands-free system 1. "Telephone" From mobile phone to the hands-free system 2. "Received calls" General Calls taken via the hands-free system can be continued via the mobile phone and vice versa. Calls that were started outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued via the hands-free system when the ignition is switched on. Depending in the mobile phone, there is an au‐ tomatic switch to the hands-free mode. If it is not automatically toggled, follow what is displayed on the mobile phone screen, and also see the instruction manual for the mobile phone. Calling a number from the list Select an entry. The connection is established. Deleting an individual entry or all entries Deletion of entries depends on the mobile phone. From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls taken via the hands-free system can also be continued via the mobile phone, depending on the mobile phone. Then follow what is displayed on the mobile phone, and also see the instruction manual of the mobile phone. 1. Mark entry. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Telephone Snap-in adapter General More detailed information on the snap-in adapt‐ ers, which compatibly support the functions of the mobile, can be obtained from the Service centre. Notes Communication Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove the protective cap from the aerial connector and from the USB port of the mobile phone if necessary. 2. Push the mobile phone with buttons up‐ wards in the direction of the electrical con‐ nections, arrow 1, and push down, arrow 2, until it engages. At high temperatures, the charging functions of the mobile can be restricted and no longer op‐ erate. When using the mobile through the vehicle, fol‐ low the user manual of the mobile. Installed position In the centre armrest. Inserting the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and take out the cover. 2. Insert snap-in adapter in the direction of ar‐ row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until the adapter engages. Removing the mobile phone Press the button and pick up the mobile phone. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 209 Communication Office Office Vehicle Equipment ▷ Office is activated, see page 201. This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Updating The data is updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appoint‐ ments, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐ dated separately. 1. "Office" 2. "Office today", "Calendar", "Tasks", "Notes" or "Reminders" Overview 3. Call up "Options". General Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐ sages and e-mails from the mobile phone can be viewed on the control display if the mobile phone supports these functions and is compatible with the corresponding Bluetooth standards. Information on which mobile phones support which Office functions can be found under www.bmw.com/bluetooth. Contents are completely displayed when the vehicle is at standstill. The system can only read from the mobile. Do not operate Office while the vehicle is in motion. 4. "Update data" Data from the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle again. Office update The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as appointments coming up are displayed. 1. "Office" 2. "Office today" 3. Select the desired entry to display details. Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions are appropriate. Otherwise, you may become distracted and endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.◀ Requirements ▷ A compatible mobile phone is registered and connected to the vehicle. For some mo‐ bile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone. ▷ Time, time zone and date, see page 80, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone, for example to display ap‐ pointments correctly. 210 Contacts Note When equipped with mobile phone preparation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Office Communication Overview Dial a phone number Contacts can be created and edited. Contacts from the mobile phone are displayed if the mo‐ bile phone supports this function. Contacts from the BMW Online address book are also dis‐ played. The addresses can be used as naviga‐ tion destinations and the phone numbers dialled directly. 1. Select the desired contact. Displaying contacts 2. Select the phone number. The connection is established. Editing contacts 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact" General 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Change entries. 4. "Save contact in car" All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. The A-Z search, see page 20, function is offered, de‐ pending on the number of contacts. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts: Symbol Storage location If a contact that comes from the mobile phone or BMW Online is edited, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone or at BMW Online. A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle. Selecting a contact as navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select address. In the vehicle, address checked as destination. In the case of contacts from the mobile phone and BMW Online address book, the address might have to be matched to the navigation data in the vehicle. If that is the case: Mobile phone. Correct the address. No symbol In the vehicle, address not checked as destination. BMW Online address book. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Displaying contacts from BMW Online Checking address as destination To display contacts from BMW Online, when logging on to BMW Online, see page 225, the function "Login automatically" must be enabled. An address that is to be added to the route guid‐ ance must match the navigation data contained Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 211 Communication Office in the vehicle. Here, the address can be checked. 4. "New contact" 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. If necessary, correct and save the address. If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is created in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone or at BMW On‐ line. Display the Internet address of a contact The Internet address stored for a contact can be called up. 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select Internet address. The selected Internet address is displayed in the browser. Displaying additional information from BMW Online Display of additional information for a contact if present at BMW Online. 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Further info (BMW Online)" 5. Input boxes still show previous input: "Clear fields" 6. To complete the input fields: select the sym‐ bol beside the input field. 7. Enter text and select a contact type. 8. In the navigation system: enter address. Only addresses that are present in the car’s navigation data can be entered. This en‐ sures that route guidance is possible for all addresses. If applicable, "Accept address" 9. "Save contact in car" Contact types Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned to various contact types. Symbol Meaning Private phone number. Work phone number. New contact Mobile phone number. General Other phone number. You can add up to 8 phone numbers, 2 ad‐ dresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one URL. Private address. 1. "Office" Work address. 2. "Contacts" 3. Call up "Options". 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Office Communication Specifying home address Deleting contacts A home address can be saved in memory. This home address appears at the top of the list of contacts. Only contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts from the mobile phone or BMW Online cannot be deleted. 1. "Home address" 1. "Office" 2. Organising contacts 2. "Contacts" 3. "Save contact in car" 3. Highlight the contact. Selecting sort order for names Names can be displayed in a different order. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts". 6. If applicable, "Yes" 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first name, surname" The sort order for names might not be the same as the selected sort order, depending on how contacts are saved on your mobile phone. Display contact images Photos saved for contacts are saved in the ve‐ hicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The number of transferred images de‐ pends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. "Options" 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. "Show pictures" Displaying all contact images is activated or de‐ activated. Messages General The display of text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone depends on whether their transmission to the vehicle is supported by the mobile phone. It is possible that text messages and e-mails are not supported by the service provider or must be enabled separately. Trans‐ mission can take a few minutes after the first time a mobile phone is paired. Messages are only displayed when they are complete. Mes‐ sages from the additional mobile phone cannot be transferred. Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A Symbol designated the message type. Symbol Message type SMS. Exporting/importing contacts My Info Contacts can be exported and imported via Per‐ sonal Profile, see page 29. The contacts stored in the vehicle are exported, not the contacts from the mobile phone or BMW Online. Message from information service. Message from BMW information service. E-mail from mobile phone Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 213 Communication Office Filter message list Use contact data The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message is available. Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 217. 1. "Filter:" Reading out text message Read out text message, see page 218. My Info Replying Send a predefined reply. 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select type of message. 3. "Answer" ▷ "All" All messages are displayed. ▷ "E-mail" Only E-mails from the mobile phone are displayed. ▷ "Service messages" Only messages from BMW Information Service, My Info and BMW Info are dis‐ played. ▷ "SMS" Only SMS messages are displayed. Select additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes‐ sage is selected: Symbol Function "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" "Call" A phone connection is established if the message contains a number. "Select phone number" SMS Calling the sender of an SMS 1. Select the desired message. 2. 2. Call up "Options". Select the symbol. Saving the sender in Contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" Select the desired number from the list if the message contains more than one number. Telephone con‐ nection is set up. "Send e-mail (BMW Online)" "Open link in browser" Message from information service Saving an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save contact in car" 214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Office Select additional functions Communication Symbol Function Additional functions are available when a mes‐ sage is selected: "Select phone number" "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Select the desired number from the list if the message contains more than one number. Telephone con‐ nection is set up. "Call" "Open link in browser" A phone connection is established if the message contains a number. Call up Internet address. "Select phone number" Detailed information of a message is displayed. This does not entail any costs. Symbol Function Select the desired number from the list if the message contains more than one number. Telephone con‐ nection is set up. "Send e-mail (BMW Online)" "Further information" E-mail Display E-mail "Open link in browser" 1. "Office" Call up Internet address. 2. "Messages" "Further information" 3. Select desired E-mail. Display additional information Display E-mail contacts If sending and receiving party of an E-mail are transferred from the mobile phone, these are shown in the E-mail. BMW Info General Messages from BMW on service actions and news from BMW. Select additional functions The following functions are available when a message is selected: Symbol Function "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" "Call" A phone connection is established if the message contains a number. "Sender/recipient" If E-mail addresses are stored in contacts, the contact is displayed. Select contact to display details. If E-mail addresses are not stored in contacts, only the E-mail address is displayed, if applica‐ ble. Use contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 217. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 215 Communication Office Deactivate complete display Display appointment Opening an E-mail in the vehicle completely transfers it to the vehicle. This may be subject to charges. 1. Select the desired appointment. 1. "Office" 2. Browse any appointments: ▷ Turn the controller. ▷ Select the symbol. 2. "Messages" 3. Call up "Options". Use contact data 4. "Fully download e-mail" Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 217. Only part of the E-mail is loaded from the mobile phone into the vehicle. Reading out e-mails Read out E-mail, see page 218. Read out appointment Read out appointment, see page 218. Tasks Calendar Display task list Display calendar Appointments in the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed. Show unfinished tasks due in the next 90 days. 1. "Office" 2. "Tasks" 1. "Office" 2. "Calendar" The current day's appointments are dis‐ played. Sort task list 1. Select headers in the task list. Select calendar day 1. Select date. 2. Select sort criterion: ▷ "Priority (!)" ▷ "Subject" 2. Select desired day or date. ▷ "Next day" ▷ "Date:" ▷ "Day before" ▷ "Today" 216 ▷ "Due date" Display task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Browse any tasks: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Office ▷ Turn the controller. ▷ Select the symbol. Use contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 217. Communication Reminders Display reminders Reminders connected to appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or task deadline has elapsed, the reminder is no longer displayed. 1. "Office" Read out task Read out task, see page 218 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The relevant appointment or task is displayed. Notes Use contact data Display notes 1. "Office" Overview 2. "Notes" All notes are displayed. Display note 1. Select the desired note. Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected. Display contact or dial telephone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display contact or dial telephone number: ▷ Select contact to display a detailed view of the contact. ▷ Select telephone number to make a di‐ rect connection. Store contact data 2. Browse any note: ▷ Turn the controller. ▷ Select the symbol Use contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, SMS, E‑mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 217. 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight telephone number or e-mail ad‐ dress. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Save as new contact" Read out note Read out note, see page 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 217 Communication Office Reading out SMS, E-mails, appointments, tasks and notes can be read out. 1. Select desired message, appointment, task or note. 2. Select the symbol. in the vehicle, depending on the number of stored appointments. Are not all appointments and task from the mo‐ bile phone displayed at the correct time? ▷ Time zone, time or date is not correctly set on the control display and the mobile phone. The E-mail attachment is not displayed. The following possibilities are available when reading out: ▷ E-mails are transferred without attach‐ ments. ▷ Texts of entries are not fully displayed. "Pause" Interrupt reading out. Select again to restart reading out. ▷ "To beginning" Read out message again from the begin‐ ning. ▷ Select the symbol. Skip paragraph. ▷ Select the symbol. Return to last paragraph. ▷ Texts are abridged before they are transfer‐ red from the mobile phone. ▷ Synchronisation between mobile phone and vehicle might take several minutes to com‐ plete. Contact photos are not displayed. ▷ A maximum of 200 contact photos can be saved in the vehicle. Are E-mails displayed with a delay? ▷ To end reading out, tip the controller to the left. ▷ Check E-mail settings on the mobile phone and adjust, if applicable. What to do if... If all the points on the list have been reviewed and the desired function cannot be run, contact Hotline or Service Centre. Information about suitable mobile phones, see page 200. Appointments, tasks, notes, SMS or E-mails from the mobile phone are not displayed. ▷ Mobile phone is not suitable for the missing function or it is not connected correctly? ▷ Office function is deactivated. ▷ Mobile phone connected as additional tele‐ phone. ▷ Appointments are more than 20 days old/ more than 50 days ahead. ▷ Appointments are marked as done or are more than 90 days ahead. ▷ Not all stored appointments, tasks, notes, messages in the mobile phone are displayed 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Contacts Communication Contacts Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. 4. To complete the input fields: select the sym‐ bol beside the input field. Note When equipped with Business mobile phone preparation or without mobile phone prepara‐ tion. General Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐ tacts from the mobile phone are displayed of the mobile phone supports this function. Addresses can be used as navigation destinations and the phone numbers dialled directly. New contact 5. Enter text, see page 20. 6. In the navigation system: enter address. Only addresses that are present in the car's navigation data can be entered. This en‐ sures that route guidance is possible for all addresses. 7. If applicable, "Save" 8. "Save contact in car" Specifying home address A home address can be saved in memory. This home address appears at the top of the list of contacts. 1. "Home address" 1. "Contacts" 2. Create contact. 2. "New contact" 3. "Save contact in car" My contacts General List of all contacts from the vehicle and the mo‐ bile phone. 3. Input boxes still show previous input: "Clear fields" Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 219 Communication Contacts 4. Tilt the controller to the left. 2. "My contacts" 5. "Yes" If a contact that comes from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle and only the copy is displayed. Under certain circumstances an identical contact entry is cre‐ ated. All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. The A-Z search, see page 20, function is offered, de‐ pending on the number of contacts. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts: Symbol Storage location No symbol In the vehicle, address not checked as destination. In the vehicle, address checked as destination. Mobile phone. Dial a phone number 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number. The connection is established. 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select address. In the case of contacts from the mobile phone, the address might have to be matched to the navigation data in the vehi‐ cle. If that is the case: Correct the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Checking address as destination An address that is to be added to the route guid‐ ance must match the navigation data contained in the vehicle. Here, the address can be checked. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address. 2. Call up "Options". Editing contacts 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact" Selecting a contact as navigation destination 3. "Check as destination" 4. If necessary, correct and save the address. If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is created in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone. Selecting sort order for names Names can be displayed in a different order. 1. "My contacts" 2. Call up "Options". 3. Change entries. 220 3. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first name, surname" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Contacts Communication The sort order for names might not be the same as the selected sort order, depending on how contacts are saved on your mobile phone. Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via Per‐ sonal Profile, see page 29. Deleting contacts Only contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted. It is not possible to delete contacts from the mo‐ bile phone. 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts". Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 221 Communication ConnectedDrive ConnectedDrive Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. BMW Assist General Assist provides certain services, for example an information service. The exact offering is country-specific. Your Service centre will be glad to answer any ques‐ tions you might have. Assist can also be used via the Internet, where additional services are available: www.bmw.com. During a connection to Assist, it might be that no telephone connection can be established via the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is to be used, disconnect it from the vehicle. ▷ The offering is country-specific. ▷ Connection charges can be incurred. ▷ Services can be limited abroad. Requirements ▷ BMW Assist is activated. If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile phone recommended by BMW for TeleSer‐ vices and configured for mobile data com‐ munication must be connected to the vehi‐ cle. ▷ The SIM card is enabled for free service numbers. ▷ There is mobile radio communications re‐ ception. ▷ The ignition is switched on. Using BMW TeleServices The TeleServices are generally activated in the vehicle. If the TeleServies are not active, it is possible to make a call to the Mobile Service. To continue to use it, or to deactivate the serv‐ ices, contact your service partner or the BMW Customer Hotline. BMW TeleServices General Information service TeleServices supports communication with the Service centre. General ▷ Data on the servicing needs of the vehicle can be transferred directly to the Service centre. In so doing, the Service centre can initiate the work needed earlier. The work‐ shop stay is shortened. ▷ In the case of a breakdown, data on the ve‐ hicle condition can be transferred to the Mo‐ bile Service. It might be that malfunctions can be remedied directly. 222 The information service provides information, for example regarding hotels, emergency chem‐ ists, etc. and provides their telephone numbers and addresses to the vehicle. Phone numbers can be called directly and addresses taken over as a destination in the navigation. Starting the information service 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 ConnectedDrive Communication Start breakdown assistance with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 2. "Info plus" General When equipped with BMW TeleServices, first through the BMW Teleservice diagnosis and then by the BMW Teleservice assistance, sup‐ port is provided. 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Mobile Care" 3. "Start service" A voice connection to the BMW information service is established. Phone numbers and ad‐ dresses can be transferred as messages. 3. "Start service" Breakdown assistance Overview It is possible to contact the Mobile Service of‐ fered by the BMW Group if you require help in the event of a breakdown. Contact with the Mobil en Service can also be done with a Check Control Message, see page 71. Start breakdown assistance without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Mobile Care" The number for breakdown assistance is displayed. If a mobile phone is connected, a connection to breakdown assistance is es‐ tablished. BMW Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables transfer of de‐ tailed vehicle data that are necessary for diag‐ nosis of the vehicle via mobile telephony. This data is transferred automatically. After transfer of the data, a voice connection to the Mobile Service is established. BMW Teleservice Assistance The Teleservice Assistance enables a deeper diagnosis of the vehicle to be gone through by the Mobile Service. As requested by the Mobile Service and on ter‐ minating the voice connection, the Teleservice Assistance can be started. Starting BMW Teleservice Assistance 1. Park the vehicle safely. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. The ignition is switched on. 4. "Teleservice Help" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 223 Communication ConnectedDrive After concluding the Teleservice Assistance, a voice connection to the Mobile Service is es‐ tablished. 2. "BMW Online" BMW Online Overview BMW Online is an online portal which provides certain services for use in the vehicle, for exam‐ ple information on weather forecasts, current news, stock market data, access to E-mails and personal address book. Licensing terms This product contains NetFront Browser Soft‐ ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. 3. If applicable, "OK" The BMW Online start page is displayed. Using BMW Online To select and display content: ▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element. ▷ Press the controller to display an element. Call up home page 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Display start page" Requirements ▷ BMW Online is applied for at the Service centre. ▷ A mobile communications network must be available. ▷ For certain services, for example informa‐ tion on current location, the vehicle must be able to determine your current location. ▷ The correct date is set, see page 80, on the control display. Reloading a page Starting BMW Online 1. Call up "Options". 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Update" Cancel 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Cancel loading" 224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 ConnectedDrive Log on BMW Live To display contacts of BMW Online or other per‐ sonal data, log on is required. Overview 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "User login" Communication BMW Live is an online portal, providing certain services available to use in the vehicle, e.g. in‐ formation on weather forecasts. BMW Live is available through the SIM card in the mobile phone. Follow the data transfer instructions, see page 201. Licensing terms This product contains NetFront Browser Soft‐ ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. 5. "User:" Requirements ▷ A mobile communications network must be available. ▷ Some of the functions need an E-mail ad‐ dress to be stored to be able to work. 6. Enter your user name and select "OK". 7. "Password:" 8. Enter your password. 9. "OK" ▷ For certain services, for example informa‐ tion on current location, the vehicle must be able to determine your current location. ▷ The current date must be set, see page 80, on the control display. Start BMW Live Automatic log on The log on takes place automatically when BMW Online is called up. 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Live" The BMW Live home page is displayed. "Login automatically" Operate BMW Live Logging off To select and display content: 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online" ▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element. ▷ Press the controller to display an element. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "User logoff" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 225 Communication ConnectedDrive Call up home page 1. Call up "Options". way as on a PC. Flash or Java applications may be displayed incorrectly. 2. "Display start page" Licensing terms Reloading a page This product contains NetFront Browser Soft‐ ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Update" NetFront is a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries. Cancel This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Cancel loading" Operating the Internet Menu bar Internet General For your own safety, the Internet is displayed only at up to approx. 5 km/h, 3 mph; for some national-market versions, only when the vehicle is at a standstill. A menu bar for operation is displayed. To acti‐ vate the menu bar, tilt the controller to the left until the cursor is located in the menu bar. Symbol Function Activate mouse pointer. The Internet is available through the SIM card installed in the vehicle or the SIM card in the mobile phone. If the Internet is used through the SIM card in the mobile phone, follow instruc‐ tions on data transmission, see page 201. Call up home page. Calling up the Internet Enter URL. Refresh, reload Cancel. Back. 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" Favourites/bookmarks. 2. "Internet" Zoom. Leave browser and cut off data con‐ nection. Navigating with the mouse pointer 1. Select the symbol. 2. Navigate with the mouse pointer on the page. 3. If applicable, "OK" The home page is displayed. It is possible that the Internet sites are not displayed in the same 226 ▷ To move the mouse pointer: tilt the con‐ troller in the corresponding direction. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 ConnectedDrive ▷ To move the mouse pointer diagonally: tilt the controller in the corresponding direction and turn it. Communication 2. "Add to favourites" ▷ To select an element: move the mouse pointer onto the element and press the controller. ▷ To scroll: turn the controller. Status display A symbol in the top left on the screen indicates the following status: Symbol Meaning No connection possible. Data transfer/connection. Secure connection. Entering Internet addresses 1. Select the symbol. 2. Enter the address and select "OK". Select favourites 1. Select the symbol. 2. Select desired favourites. Delete favourites 1. Select the symbol. 2. Highlight the favourite to be deleted. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete favourite" or "Delete all favourites" Tilt the controller upwards to switch be‐ tween upper and lower case. Set the favourite as home page 1. Favourites/bookmarks Select the symbol. 2. Highlight the desired favourite. 3. Call up "Options". Add favourites 4. "Set as start page" The currently displayed page is saved as a fa‐ vourite. Settings 1. Select the symbol. Suppressing cookies 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Suppress cookies" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 227 Communication ConnectedDrive Suppressing pop-ups 3. "Start service" 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Suppress pop-ups" Suppressing security warnings 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Suppress HTTPS pop-ups" Hotline A Teleservice Call can also be started through a Check Control Message, see page 71. Overview Contact the BMW Hotline for information cov‐ ering every aspect of the vehicle. Calling the hotline Vehicle without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Hotline" The telephone number of the hotline is dis‐ played. If a mobile phone is connected, a con‐ nection to the hotline is established. Automatic Teleservice call The Teleservice data on the service require‐ ment for the vehicle are transmitted to your serv‐ ice partner automatically when a service is due. If possible, the partner will make contact and a service appointment can be agreed. Checking when your service partner was noti‐ fied: 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" Teleservice Call Overview Sends information to your service partner indi‐ cating that a service appointment is to be agreed. The Teleservice data is transferred. If possible, your service partner will establish con‐ tact with you. Starting a Teleservice Call 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Teleservice Call" 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 ConnectedDrive 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Last Teleservice Call" Communication Service partners Possible contact with the Service Partner. Displaying service partners 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Your Service" With the mobile phone registered, a con‐ nection is made to the Service Partner. Service status Teleservice Report As needed, transfers the technical data from your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals. This is used to evaluate the further development of BMW products. The Teleservice Report is activated free of charge for vehicles with certain technical re‐ quirements and with a valid Assist contract. Display available services Display of all services available in the vehicle. 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service status" 3. "Available services" Neither personal information nor position data are transferred. Displays when the last Teleservice Report has been transferred: 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Call up "Options". Updating BMW Services 4. "Last Teleservice Info" Manually update all the services available in the vehicle. Teleservice Battery Guard "Update BMW Services" Teleservice Battery Guard constantly checks the battery charge level of the vehicle. If the bat‐ tery charge level falls below a certain value, in‐ formation is automatically sent to you service partner. If required, they will contact you to agree a service appointment. Teleservice Battery Guard is only available for vehicles with certain technical prerequisites and with valid BMW ConnectedDrive contract. Data transfer When updating BMW services, the status of the data transfer is displayed. 1. "BMW Services" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Data transfer" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 229 Communication ConnectedDrive Apps Display status Overview Information on the currently available software applications can be displayed. Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐ bile phone can be integrated into the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. Operation is done using the iDrive. Requirements ▷ Suitable mobile phone. ▷ The operating system of the mobile phone supports the software applications of Apps. ▷ Software applications are installed on op‐ erational on the mobile phone. ▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract. Any additional costs incurred are not the component of Apps. ▷ Only use software applications approved by BMW, otherwise there may be malfunctions. Information on suitable mobile phone, available software applications and their installation is available under www.bmw.com/connectivity or from your Service centre. Input data Only make inputs when traffic activity per‐ mits. The vehicle occupants and other road users could otherwise be endangered due to lack of concentration. Some software applications can only be used when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea‐ sons.◀ Operating Apps 1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter or the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application. 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps" PlugIn Selected functions of the mobile phone are shown on the Control Display. Operation is done using the iDrive. 1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. "PlugIn" 4. "Activate PlugIn" 5. Using the controller, navigate in the desired functions and, for example, selected the de‐ sire category or title. Press the button to go one level higher or back within the functions of the mobile phone. Press button twice to change back to the main menu. Notes ▷ The extent of apps which can be shown on the control display depends on the extent of software applications installed on the mo‐ bile phone. ▷ The data transfer of the software applica‐ tions from the mobile phone to the vehicle may take a while. Some software applica‐ tions are dependent on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone. ▷ Some mobile phones cannot use apps and Bluetooth hands-free at the same time. Restart the software application on the mo‐ bile phone after a telephone call as neces‐ sary. 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Extended BMW Online services Communication Extended BMW Online services Vehicle Equipment BMW Online and Internet This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. ▷ BMW Online, see page 224. ▷ Internet, see page 226. General The extended BMW Online services provides scope for exchanges of information and data with the vehicle via BMW Online. The following section lists the functions of the extended BMW Online services. Navigation ▷ Importing trips, see page 156. ▷ Information on points of interest from BMW Online, see page 153. ▷ Displaying current traffic regulations and country information, see page 164. CD/multimedia ▷ Updating album information, see page 187. Contacts ▷ Show BMW Online address book, see page 211. Personal Profile ▷ Exporting/importing a user profile, see page 29. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Mobility To assist you in preserving your car’s mobility, this section contains important information on operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenance and minor repairs. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Mobility Refuelling Refuelling Vehicle Equipment 2. Turn the fuel filler cap anticlockwise. This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. General Refuel in good time If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, you should refuel as soon as possible, or engine function may be impaired and damage may oc‐ cur.◀ 3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the fuel filler flap. For diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel pumps. Fuel tank cap Closing Opening 1. Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is clearly heard to click into place. 1. Briefly press rear edge of fuel filler flap. 2. Close fuel filler cap. Do not crush the retaining strap Do not jam the strap attached to the tank cap, as otherwise the tank cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapours can escape.◀ Unlocking fuel filler flap manually For example in the event of an electrical fault. 234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Refuelling Mobility Pull the green tag with the fuel pump symbol. Fuel filler flap is unlocked. Note when refuelling When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into the filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during re‐ fuelling results in: ▷ The fuel supply being cut off prematurely. ▷ Fuel vapour and fumes being fed back less effectively. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out for the first time. Do not overfill fuel tank Do not overfill fuel tank, otherwise damage may be caused to the environment and the ve‐ hicle due to seepage of fuel.◀ Handling fuels Comply with the safety regulations dis‐ played at filling stations.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 235 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Minimum grade Do not fill up with petrol below the mini‐ mum grade indicated, otherwise the engine op‐ eration is not ensured.◀ Diesel Incorrect refuelling Do not refuel any rape seed methyl ester – RME –, green diesel or petrol. Fuel grade Petrol For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as pos‐ sible. Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal must not be used. Only refuel with unleaded petrol without metallic additives Do not refuel with leaded petrol or petrol with metallic additives, for example, manganese or iron, otherwise it may cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo‐ nents.◀ You can fill up with fuels with a maximum pro‐ portion of ethanol of 10 %, i.e. E10. Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85 % ethanol, or flex fuel, as otherwise the en‐ gine and fuel supply system will be damaged.◀ Petrol grade After refuelling a wrong fuel, do not start the en‐ gine, otherwise there is danger of engine dam‐ age.◀ Contact your Service centre if the wrong type of fuel has been added. Diesel quality The engine is designed to run on diesel fuel to DIN EN 590. Winter-grade diesel No diesel additives Do not incorporate any additives, includ‐ ing petrol, as these could cause damage to the engine.◀ Winter-grade diesel must be used to ensure re‐ liable operation of the diesel engine during the cold season. It is sold at filling stations over that period. Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equip‐ ment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during operation. The engine has anti-knock control. This means that different grades of petrol can be used. The use of Super 95 RON petrol is recommen‐ ded. Fuel qualities of 91 RON and higher are permit‐ ted. 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Fuel Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Mobility 237 Mobility Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres Vehicle Equipment Tyre pressure values This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Tyre pressures Information for your safety A tyre’s condition and pressure influence the following: ▷ Operating life of the tyre. ▷ Driving safety. ▷ Driving comfort. The inflation pressures specified for approved tyre sizes are located on the door pillar of the driver's door. If the speed code letter for the tyre cannot be located, use the tyre pressure for the corre‐ sponding size, for example 255/50 R 19. For Australia/New Zealand Checking pressures Checking tyre pressures regularly Check regularly and adjust as necessary, but at least twice a month and before any long journey. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely affect the car’s road holding and cause tyre damage, which could result in an accident.◀ After correcting the tyre pressure: ▷ Re-initialise the runflat indicator Inflation pressures are specified on the tyre label affixed to the driver’s door post. Warning The inflation pressures on the tyre label are applicable only for tyres explicitly mentioned on the label. Inflation pressures for tyres that may be covered by the label – by size, speed category and load rating/load index – but not ex‐ plicitly mentioned on the label may be different. Please obtain adequate inflation pressures in accordance with the tyre manufacturer’s speci‐ fications at your tyre dealer.◀ Tyre sizes Inflation pressures refer to the approved and recommended tyre sizes and tyre makes. Your Service centre will be glad to provide more information on wheels and tyres. 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Wheels and tyres Mobility Tyre tread ▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐ nounced pulling to the left or right. Summer tyres Damage can be caused by, for example, running over kerbs, road damage etc. The tyre tread depth should not be less than 3 mm, 1/8 in. Below a tread depth of 3 mm, 1/8 in, there is a high risk of aquaplaning. In the event of tyre damage Winter tyres If there are indications of tyre damage, re‐ duce speed immediately and have the wheels and tyres checked without delay, otherwise there is an increased risk of accident. The tyre tread depth should not be less than 4 mm, 3/16 in. Drive carefully to the nearest Service centre or specialist tyre dealer. Below a tread depth of 4 mm, 3/16 in, suitability for vehicle operation in winter is restricted. Have the car towed there if necessary. Minimum tread depth Otherwise tyre damage can cause danger of death to vehicle occupants and also other roadusers.◀ Repairing tyre damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle advises against having damaged run-flat tyres repaired; have them replaced in‐ stead. Otherwise subsequent damage cannot be excluded.◀ Wear indicators are distributed across the tyre circumference and have the legally prescribed minimum height of 1.6 mm, 1/16 in. Age of tyres They are identified on the tyre’s side wall by TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. Irrespective of wear, change tyres after six years at the latest. Recommendation Date of manufacture Tyre damage On the tyre side wall: General DOT … 3611: the tyre was made in the 36th week of 2011. Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres‐ ence of foreign bodies and wear. Notes Vehicle behaviour that is an indication of tyre damage or other faults: ▷ Unusual vibrations while the vehicle is in motion. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 239 Mobility Wheels and tyres Replacement of wheels and tyres Recommended makes of tyre Fitting Information on tyre mounting Only have tyres fitted, including balancing, by your Service Centre or by a specialist tyre dealer. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐ sult in consequential damage and thus consti‐ tute a safety risk.◀ Wheel and tyre combination Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle depending on tyre size. These can be seen by the asterisk on the side wall of the tyre. Your Service centre can provide details of the right wheel/tyre combination and rim designs for your car. When properly used, these tyres meet the high‐ est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics. Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations will in‐ terfere with the proper functioning of various systems, such as ABS and DSC. New tyres To maintain good vehicle handling, always fit tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all wheels. After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original wheel and tyre combination again. Approved wheels and tyres The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ mends using only wheels and tyres that have been approved for a specific vehicle type. Even if nominally the same dimension, tyres could make contact with the body, for example due to manufacturing tolerances and result in serious accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle is unable to assess the suitability of tyres and wheels it has not approved, and therefore cannot guarantee their safety.◀ New tyres do not achieve their full road grip im‐ mediately, for production reasons. During the first 300 km, 200 miles, drive mod‐ erately. Retreaded tyres The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against the use of retreaded tyres. Retreaded tyres Due to their potentially different internal construction and advanced age, their durability may be limited and their road safety therefore questionable.◀ Winter tyres Winter tyres are recommended for operation on winter roads or at temperatures below +7 ℃/+45 ℉. Although so-called all-season tyres with an M+S marking have better winter characteristics than summer tyres, they do not normally match the performance of winter tyres. 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Wheels and tyres Top speed of winter tyres If the car is capable of speeds higher than the speed permitted for the winter tyres, a sticker stating the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in the driver's field of view. Specialist tyre dealers and your Service centre can supply the sticker. Mobility Run-flat tyres Label Top speed for winter tyres Do not exceed the top speed for the winter tyres in use, otherwise tyre damage potentially leading to an accident could occur.◀ Run-flat tyres RSC marking on the tyre side wall. For your own safety, when using run-flat tyres, do not mix with other types of tyre. There is no spare wheel available in the event of a puncture. Your Service centre will be pleased to advise. These wheels consist of tyres that are self-sup‐ porting within certain limitations, and special rims. Interchanging front and rear wheels The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against interchanging the front and rear wheels. This could impair vehicle handling. The reinforced side wall means that the tyre keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if pressure has been lost. Continue driving with the damaged tyre, see page 94. Changing run-flat tyres Tyre storage Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and pref‐ erably dark place when not in use. Protect tyres against contamination from oil, grease and fuel. Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure indi‐ cated on the tyre's side wall. For your own safety, use only run-flat tyres. There is no spare wheel available in the event of a puncture. Your Service centre will be pleased to advise. Remedying punctures Safety precautions in the event of a punc‐ ture Park the vehicle on a solid surface and as far away from moving traffic as possible. Switch on hazard warning lights. Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight ahead position of the wheels. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, also ap‐ ply the parking brake and with automatic gear‐ box engage the P position. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 241 Mobility Wheels and tyres Allow all occupants get out of the vehicle and guide them out of the danger area, for example behind the crash barrier. Compressor Set up warning triangle an appropriate distance away. Comply with relevant local laws.◀ Mobility system Notes 1 On/Off button ▷ Please observe the instructions on the ap‐ plication of the Mobility system which are on the compressor and the sealant cylinder. 2 Mounting for cylinder 3 Reduce tyre inflation pressure 4 Tyre inflation pressure display 5 Compressor 6 Plug/cable for socket 7 Connecting hose — stored in the compres‐ sor floor ▷ Applying the Mobility system can be inef‐ fective for tyre damage as from a size of ap‐ proximately 4 mm. ▷ Contact a Service centre if you are unable to put the tyre back in operation. ▷ If possible, foreign matter that has penetra‐ ted the tyre should remain inside the tyre. ▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the sealant cylinder and attach to the steering wheel. Fill with sealing compound 1. Shake sealant cylinder. Storage The Mobility system is located in the boot be‐ neath the floor panel. Sealant cylinder 2. Take the connecting hose entirely from the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. ▷ Sealant cylinder, arrow 1. ▷ Filler hose, arrow 2. Check the expiry date on the sealant cylinder. 242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Wheels and tyres Mobility 3. Plug the connecting hose onto the connec‐ tor of the sealant cylinder until it clicks. 6. Insert the plug into a socket in the vehicle while the compressor is switched off. 4. Push the sealant bottle upright into the bracket on the compressor housing, until it clicks. 7. Switch on the compressor with the ignition switched on or the engine running. 5. Screw the connecting tube onto the valve of the faulty wheel. Let the compressor run for approximately three to 8 minutes to fill the sealing compound and achieve a tyre inflation pressure of approxi‐ mately 2.5 bar. The inflation pressure may rise to approximately five bar during the filling process of the sealing compound. Do not switch off the compressor during this step. Enclosed spaces Never run the engine in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the exhaust gas can lead to loss of consciousness with fatal consequences. The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.◀ Switch off compressor after ten minutes Do not operate the compressor for more than ten minutes, otherwise the device will over‐ heat and this could result in damage.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 243 Mobility Wheels and tyres If it does not reach a pressure of 2 bar: 1. Switch off compressor. 3. Plug the connecting hose directly into the compressor. 2. Remove the filler hose from the wheel. 3. 10 m/400 inches to distribute the sealing compound in the tyre. 4. Re-inflate the tyre with the compressor. Contact a Service centre if the device does not reach a tyre inflation pressure of 2 bar. Store Mobility system 1. Remove the connecting hose of the sealant cylinder from the wheel. 4. Insert a plug into the socket in the vehicle. 2. Remove the connecting hose from the seal‐ ant cylinder. 3. Pack empty sealant cylinder and connecting hose to avoid soiling in the boot. 4. Store Mobility system in the car again. Spread sealant compound Immediately drive for approx. 10 km/5 miles to evenly distribute the sealing compound in the tyre. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. If possible, not do drive slower than 20 km/h, 12 mph. Correcting the tyre inflation pressure 1. Stop in a suitable area. 2. Screw connecting hose onto the tyre valve. 5. Correct tyre inflation pressure to 2.5 bar. ▷ Increase pressure: switch on the com‐ pressor with the engine running or the ignition switched on. ▷ Reduce pressure: press the button on the compressor. Continue with journey Do not exceed maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. Reinitialise runflat indicator, see page 93. Have the punctured tyre and the sealant cylinder of the Mobility system replaced as soon as pos‐ sible. Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested, found safe for use in traffic, and recom‐ mended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. 244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Wheels and tyres Mobility The Service centre is able to provide the details of these makes. Use Snow chains may only be used in pairs on the rear wheels with tyres of the following sizes: ▷ 195/55 R 16. ▷ 205/55 R 16. ▷ 205/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 17. Observe the chain manufacturer's instructions. Ensure that the snow chains are always ade‐ quately taut. Re-tighten them if necessary in ac‐ cordance with the chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. Do not initialise the runflat indicator with snow chains fitted, as the instrument might otherwise issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, activate Dy‐ namic Traction Control briefly if necessary. Maximum speed with snow chains When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed 50 km/h, 30 mph. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 245 Mobility Engine compartment Engine compartment Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Important accessories in the engine compartment 1 Starting assistance, negative terminal 7 Oil filler neck 2 Identification number 8 Coolant tank 3 Reservoir for washer fluid 4 Starting assistance, positive terminal 5 Engine compartment fuse box 6 Dipstick for engine oil Bonnet If you are not aware of the regulations to follow, work on the vehicle should only be carried out by Service. Notes Working in the engine compartment Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. 246 In diesel engines, the coolant tank is located on the opposite side of the engine compart‐ ment. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐ sult in consequential damage and thus consti‐ tute a safety risk.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Engine compartment Do not reach into the engine compartment Mobility Closing bonnet Do not reach into intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise there is the risk of injury, for example, due to ro‐ tating or hot parts.◀ Fold out wiper arms Before opening the bonnet ensure that the wiper arms are resting on the windscreen, oth‐ erwise damage may occur.◀ Open bonnet 1. Pull the lever in the interior: Bonnet is released, arrow 1. Let the bonnet fall from approximately 40 cm, 16 in and then push down to fully lock the bon‐ net. The bonnet must audibly snap into place on both sides. Bonnet open while the vehicle is in motion Should it appear while the vehicle is in mo‐ tion that the bonnet has not been properly locked, stop immediately and close properly.◀ Risk of trapping 2. After releasing the lever, pull on the lever again: To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the bonnet is unobstructed during clos‐ ing.◀ Bonnet can be opened, arrow 2. Indicator and warning lights With the bonnet opened, a check control mes‐ sage is shown. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 247 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle Equipment The oil level must be between the two mark‐ ings of the dipstick. This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. The oil level between the two markings of the dipstick is approximately 1 litre, approx‐ imately 2 pints. Do not exceed upper marking Do not exceed upper marking of the dip‐ stick. General The engine oil consumption depends on the driving style and operating conditions. Therefore check the engine oil level regularly after each time you fill up. For 116i, 118i and 116ed: Check oil level with dipstick Too much oil topped up is damaging for the en‐ gine. Have the car checked as soon as possi‐ ble.◀ For 125i, 116d, 118d, 120d and 125d: Check oil level electronically Principle Checking the oil level The oil level is electronically monitored when travelling and shown on the control display. 1. Vehicle with engine at operating tempera‐ ture after min. 10 km, approx. 6 miles trip, park horizontally. If the oil level reaches the minimum, a check control message is shown. 2. Stop the engine. Requirements 3. After approximately 5 minutes remove and wipe off with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or similar. ▷ Engine running and at operating tempera‐ ture after driving at least 10 km, 6 miles. ▷ Vehicle stationary and on level surface. Displaying oil level 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" Possible messages ▷ "Engine oil level OK" 4. Carefully push the dipstick into the measur‐ ing tube until it stops and remove again. 248 ▷ "Engine oil at minimum. Add 1 litre of engine oil!" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Engine oil Top up within the next 200 km, 120 miles top up 1 litre, 2 pints of oil. ▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add one litre!" Immediately top up 1 litre, approximately 2 pints oil. Detailed measurement Prerequisites: Mobility the instrument cluster is shown or the oil level has dropped to barely the lower marking of the dipstick. Adding oil Top up oil within the next 200 km, 120 miles. Otherwise the engine can be dam‐ aged.◀ Do not top up with too much engine oil ▷ Vehicle is on a level street and with the en‐ gine at operating temperature. ▷ Gearbox: gear lever in idling position, clutch and gas pedal not applied. ▷ Automatic gearbox: gear lever in gearbox position N or P and gas pedal not applied. Carry out a detailed measurement of the engine oil level: With too much engine oil topped up, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise engine damage can be caused.◀ Protecting children Keep all oils, greases etc. out of the reach of children, and read and comply with any warn‐ ing instructions on the containers, to avoid any health risks.◀ 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" The oil level is checked and shown on a scale. During the detailed measurement, the idling speed is slightly raised. Duration: approximately 1 minute. Oil types for filling up Notes No oil additives Oil additives could lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Viscosity classes with engine oils Adding engine oil Filler neck When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the motor oil has one of the viscosity classes SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 oder SAE 5W-30 otherwise functional disruptions or en‐ gine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is decisive for the life or the engine. Several oil types are not available in all countries. Only top up a maximum quantity of 1 litre, ap‐ proximately 2 pints of oil when the message in Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 249 Mobility Engine oil Approved oil grades Petrol engine BMW Longlife-01 BMW Longlife-01 FE BMW Longlife-04 Diesel engine BMW Longlife-04 Further information on approved types of oil can be asked for at the Service centre. Alternative oil grades If approved oils are not available 1 litre, approx‐ imately 2 pints of an oil with the following spec‐ ification can be topped up: Petrol engine BMW Longlife-98 ACEA A3/B4 Diesel engine ACEA C3 Oil change Only have the oil change carried out by a Service centre. 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Coolant Mobility Coolant Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. low the pressure to escape before opening it fully. General Danger of scalding while the engine is hot Do not open up the cooling system while the engine is hot, otherwise you may scald your‐ self on the escaping coolant steam.◀ Suitable additives Use only suitable additives, otherwise the engine could incur damage. The additives are injurious to health.◀ Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit‐ able for your vehicle. Your Service centre can provide details of which additives are suitable. 3. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct level; do not overfill. 4. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to click into place. 5. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as soon as possible. Disposal When disposing of coolant and coolant additives, comply with the relevant en‐ vironmental protection regulations. Coolant level Check 1. Allow the engine to cool down. 2. The coolant level is correct if it is between the Min. and Max. marks. The marks are on the side of the coolant tank. Top up 1. Allow the engine to cool down. 2. Turn the cap on the coolant tank slightly anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then al‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 251 Mobility Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Periods out of use Immobilisation periods with the battery discon‐ nected are not taken into account. Updating the time-dependent maintenance scope such a brake fluid and any engine oil and microfilter or activated carbon filter can be done by a Service centre. BMW Maintenance System Service history The maintenance system points out the neces‐ sary maintenance measures and so supports you in maintaining the road and operational safety of the vehicle. Have maintenance work carried out by the Serv‐ ice centre and entered in the vehicle data. The entries are, just like a service booklet, evidence of regular maintenance. Condition Based Service, CBS Sensors and advanced algorithms monitor the conditions in which your vehicle is used. Condi‐ tion Based Service uses this information to cal‐ culate the maintenance requirements. The system thus enables adaptation of the scope of maintenance to the individual usage profile. Detailed information on service requirements, see page 74, can be displayed at the control dis‐ play. Service data in the remote control Information on maintenance requirements is continually saved in the remote control. The Service centre reads out this data and then sug‐ gests a set of maintenance routines optimised on this basis. Maintenance entered is shown on the Control Display, see page 75. For Australia/New Zealand: Maintenance No maintenance work other than normal main‐ tenance is required to keep the emission levels of your vehicle within the design limits. Overview: maintenance schedule Standard schedule Maintenance work Examine Check Control messages. Examine indicator and warning messages. This is why you should hand over the remote control that was last used for driving to your service advisor. 252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Maintenance Engine oil Mobility Maintenance work Maintenance work Replace engine oil and oil filter. Automatic air conditioning: replace the micro‐ filter. With a petrol engine: With every second engine oil change. Replace spark plugs With diesel engine: With every second engine oil change. Replace the fuel filter, with lower fuel grades, shorten the replacement interval. With every second engine oil change. Intake noise damper: replace air-filter element; with heavier dust deposit, reduce change in‐ terval. Reset service display in line with workshop guidelines. Parking brake: check condition, brake pad thickness and function. Reset service display in line with workshop guidelines. Brake fluid Maintenance work Replace brake fluid. Parking brake: check function of brake en‐ gagement. Reset service display in line with workshop guidelines. Vehicle check Maintenance work Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard warning system. Check instrument lighting and dial lighting and heating fan. Front brake Maintenance work Check lighting system. Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts. Brake discs: check surface and thickness. Reset service display in line with workshop guidelines. Seat belt: check condition of the seat belt strap, function of roller mechanism, belt inter‐ lock and belt buckle. Check windscreen wiper and washer system. Mobility system: check expiry date on the seal‐ ant bottle. Rear brakes Tyres: tread depth, running surface, check outer condition and filling pressure. Maintenance work Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts. Brake discs: check surface and thickness. Initialise runflat indicator RPA. Check the coolant level and concentration. Windscreen washer: check fluid level. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 253 Mobility Maintenance Emissions Maintenance work Brake hoses and connectors: check for leaks, damage and correct position. Underbody, including all visible parts: check for damage, corrosion, sealing including seal of shock absorbers and check the fitting of springs. Steering components: check clearance, leak‐ ing, damage and wear. Check for road safety, test drive: braking, steering, shock absorbers, gears. Reset service display in line with workshop guidelines. Separate calculation Replacement work, spare parts, operating ma‐ terials and wear material are calculated sepa‐ rately. You can get further information from the Service centre. Socket for on-board diagnosis, OBD Position ▷ The warning light flashes: Engine malfunction that could dam‐ age the catalytic converter. Have the car checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light is illuminated: Deterioration of exhaust emissions. Have the car checked as soon as possible. Data memory Your vehicle saves data about operation, faults and user settings. This data is saved in the ve‐ hicle and partly also in the remote control. The information can be read out with suitable devi‐ ces, especially at the Service centre. The data read-out is used to support service processes and repair or for optimising and developing ve‐ hicle functions. If there is also a BMW Assist contract, certain vehicle data can also be send directly from the vehicle to allow the desired services. Recycling The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends handing the vehicle in at a take-back point nom‐ inated by the BMW Group. The regulations con‐ cerning the returning of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to country. Your Service cen‐ tre will be glad to provide information. The OBD socket for checking components de‐ finitive in terms of the composition of the ex‐ haust emissions is on the driver's side. 254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Replacing parts Mobility Replacing parts Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Front wiper blades, replacing 1. Fold out wiper arm and hold firm. 2. Press together securing spring, arrow 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2. On-board tool kit 3. Take the wiper blade forwards out of the fit‐ ting. 4. Insert new wiper blade in the opposite se‐ quence until it engages. Risk of damage The tool kit is located behind the left flap in the boot. Turn to open the handle. Replacing the wiper blades Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are resting on the windscreen, otherwise damage may oc‐ cur.◀ Change rear wiper blade 1. Fold out wiper arm. General Do not fold the wipers onto the wind‐ screen without wiper blades 2. Rotate wiper blade backwards until it stops. Do not fold in wiper if no wiper blades are fitted, otherwise damage may occur to the window glass.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 255 Mobility Replacing parts 3. Continue to rotate wiper blade against the stop and therefore press out of the fasten‐ ing. Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ 4. Press new wiper blade into the fastening un‐ til you hear it engaging. Light-emitting diodes, LEDs Replacing bulbs General Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐ ing safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have the corresponding work carried out by the Service Centre, if you are not familiar with them or they are not described here. A replacement bulb box can be obtained from the Service centre. Risk of sustaining burns Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch. Otherwise, burns could result.◀ Working on the lighting system Before performing any work on the light‐ ing system, switch off the lights in question, oth‐ erwise there is a risk of short-circuits. Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb manufacturer to avoid the risk of injury or dam‐ age when changing bulbs.◀ Do not perform any work on or replace bulbs on the xenon lights Controls, displays and other equipment items inside your car have light-emitting diodes be‐ hind a cover as their light source. These resemble conventional lasers and are classified by legislation as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours at a time, as this could cause irri‐ tation to the retina.◀ Headlight glass During cool or humid weather, the exterior lights can mist over. When driving with the light switched on, the condensation disappears after a short time. There is no need to replace the headlight glass. If the headlights do not defrost, even when driv‐ ing with the lights switched on and increasing moisture builds up, for example water droplets in the lights, have these checked by the service centre. Front lights, replacing the bulbs Halogen headlights Work on the xenon light system, including changing the bulb, must always be performed by a Service centre. Otherwise there is a risk of potentially fatal accidents if work is performed inexpertly, because of the high electrical vol‐ tages present.◀ Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with your fingers, because even slight amounts of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb and reduce its working life. 256 1 Daytime driving lights 2 Turn indicator Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Replacing parts Mobility 3 Low-beam headlights Turn indicator 4 High-beam headlights/headlight flasher 21 Watt bulb, PY21W 5 Side lights 1. Turn bulb holder anticlockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2. Access to turn indicators and low-beam headlights Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. 1. In the wheel arches, remove both brackets and the cover. 2. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn anticlockwise and remove. 3. Fit new bulb and bulb holder in the reverse sequence. 4. Close headlight casing with lid Ensure that the lid audibly engages. 2. Turn the cover anticlockwise and remove. 5. Attach the cover in the wheel arch. Low-beam headlights H7 bulb, 55 watts 1. Turn bulb holder anticlockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2. 2. Remove bulb from bulb holder. 3. Fit new bulb and bulb holder in the reverse sequence. 4. Close headlight casing with lid Ensure that the lid audibly engages. 5. Attach the cover in the wheel arch. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 257 Mobility Replacing parts Access to daytime driving lights, Full beam/ light signal and side light Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. 1. Open bonnet, see page 246. 2. Turn the cover anticlockwise and remove. Daytime driving lights 21 Watt bulb, W21W 1. Push together holders, arrow 1, and care‐ fully remove bulb holder, arrow 2. High-beam headlights/headlight flasher H7 bulb, 55 watts 1. As needed, remove the bulb holder of the daylight driving light bulb, see page 258. 2. Turn bulb holder, arrow 1, and carefully re‐ move bulb holder, arrow 2. 3. Remove bulb from bulb holder. 4. To insert bulb and bulb holder, proceed in the opposite sequence. Bulb holder must audibly engage. 5. Close headlight casing with lid Side lights 6 Watt bulb, H6W 1. As needed, remove the bulb holder of the daylight driving light bulb, see page 258. 2. Pull out bulb holder. 2. Remove bulb from bulb holder. 3. To insert the new bulb, proceed in the op‐ posite sequence. Bulb holder must audibly engage. 4. Close headlight casing with lid 3. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn anticlockwise and remove. 4. To insert bulb and bulb holder, proceed in the opposite sequence. Bulb holder must audibly engage. 5. Close headlight casing with lid 258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Replacing parts Xenon headlight Mobility 21 Watt bulb, PY21W 1. Open bonnet, see page 246. Xenon light These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. Frequent switching on and off shortens the service life. 2. Turn the cover anticlockwise and remove. If a bulb fails, you can continue driving moder‐ ately with fog lights. Observe any applicable country-specific laws. Do not perform any work on or replace bulbs on the xenon lights Work on the xenon light system, including changing the bulb, must always be performed by a Service centre. Otherwise there is a risk of potentially fatal accidents if work is performed inexpertly, because of the high electrical vol‐ tages present.◀ 3. Turn bulb holder anticlockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2. Headlights 4. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn anticlockwise and remove. 5. To insert bulb and bulb holder, proceed in the opposite sequence. 1 Turn indicator 6. Close headlight casing with lid 2 Side lights/Daytime driving lights 3 Low-beam headlights/high-beam head‐ lights/headlight flasher Front fog lights The low-beam headlights and high-beam head‐ lights use xenon technology. The side lights and daytime driving lights use LED technology. Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. H8 bulb, 35 Watts 1. With the rear of the screwdriver from the onboard tool, unscrew the three screws, ar‐ In the event of a defect, contact your Service centre. Turn indicator Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 259 Mobility Replacing parts row 1 of the wheel arch trim Carefully lift wheel arch trim, arrow 2. Rear lights, replacing the bulbs Overview 2. Pull the plug from the bulb, arrow 1. Turn bulb, arrow 2. 1 Brake light Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. 2 Turn indicator Right side of vehicle: turn anticlockwise. 3 Rear light Remove bulb. 4 Reversing light orrear fog lights Changing bulb Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. Turn indicator: 21 Watt bulb, PY21W Brake, rear, rear fog or reversing light: 21 Watt bulb, P21W 3. Insert new bulb, connect plug and screw on wheel arch trim. Turn indicator in exterior mirror Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. Turn indicators are designed in the LED tech‐ nology. In the event of a defect, contact your Service centre. 260 With adaptive cornering light or xenon head‐ lights: rear lights are designed in LED technol‐ ogy. In the event of a defect, contact your Serv‐ ice centre. Remove tail light 1. Opening the tailgate. 2. On the lid on both holders, arrow 1, undo and remove the lid, arrow 2. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Replacing parts 3. The rear light is fastened to one point on the outside and two points on the inside. With the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard tool, undo the nut of the lower fasten‐ ing, arrow 1, and remove. Ensure that the nut does not fall into the bumper. Mobility Ensure that the tail light does not jam onto the body, arrow 2. The upper fastening is a rubber bearing, ar‐ row 2. 6. Undo upper rest on the plug of the connect‐ ing cable and remove plug from the bulb holder. Replacing bulbs 4. Grasp the handle bar with one hand, arrow 1, and hold against the outside with your free hand, arrow 2. Carefully lift out the rear light, arrow 3, until it releases from the upper rub‐ ber bearing, arrow 4. 1. Undo five fastenings on the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the rear light. 2. Press the faulty bulb gently into the fitting, turn anticlockwise and remove. 5. Carefully pull the rear light from the outer rubber bearing, arrow 1, towards the rear. 3. To use the new bulb and attach the bulb holder, proceed in the opposite sequence. Ensure that the bulb holder engages in all fastenings. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 261 Mobility Replacing parts Installing rear light 1. Connect the cable to the rear light. change for tyre pressure loss in case of break‐ down is not required. 2. Lift the lower edge of the trim a little, so that the rear light can be pushed under the trim. The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your Service centre. Jack mounting points 3. Put the rear light onto both rubber bearings and press firmly. Ensure that the rear light engages in the rubber bearings. The jacking points are at the positions marked. Thiefproof wheel studs The thiefproof wheel studs can be found in the tool kit or in an oddments tray in the tool kit, see page 255. 4. Screw on rear light with the nut and fit lid. Centre brake light and number plate lights Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 256. Lights designed in LED technology. In the event of a defect, contact your Service centre. ▷ Wheel stud, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2. Removing Changing a wheel 1. Place the adapter on the wheel stud. Notes After reattaching the wheel stud, remove the adapter again. Due to the vehicle equipment, no spare wheel is available. 2. Unscrew wheel stud. For tyres with emergency running properties or when using tyre sealants, immediate wheel 262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Replacing parts Mobility Car battery Power failure Maintenance After a temporary power supply interruption, some items of equipment must be reinitialised. The battery does not require routine mainte‐ nance, in other words the quantity of acid it con‐ tains is sufficient for the full operating life of the battery. If you have any queries regarding the battery, your Service centre will be pleased to advise you. Replacing the battery Only use approved vehicle batteries. Only use vehicle batteries that are ap‐ proved by the manufacturer of your vehicle. Oth‐ erwise the vehicle may be damaged and availa‐ bility of systems or functions may be limited.◀ When the vehicle battery has been changed, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your Service centre to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and any appropriate Check Control messages are no longer dis‐ played. Recharging the battery Note Do not connect charger to socket Do not connect battery charger to the sockets installed in the vehicle in the factory, otherwise this could damage the vehicle.◀ Individual settings must be updated: ▷ Seat and mirror memory: re-save positions. ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Radio transmitter: re-save. ▷ Navigation system: wait until the navigation is functioning properly. Disposing of the old battery Dispose of old batteries only at an au‐ thorised collecting point or hand them in to your Service centre. Batteries filled with acid should be transported and stored upright. Protect batteries against falling over when in transit. Fuses Notes Replacing fuses Do not repair blown fuses or replace them with fuses with different colours or ampere rat‐ ings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires could cause a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and details of the fuse assign‐ ment can be found with the fuses in the boot. Jump-starting connections Recharge the battery only with the engine stop‐ ped, via the jump-starting connections, see page 267, in the engine compartment. Charger The user of a charger makes sure the battery is sufficiently charged even when making frequent short trips. Chargers developed especially for the vehicle and attuned to the on-board network can be obtained from the Service centre. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 263 Mobility Replacing parts In the engine compartment Inside the boot 1. Undo the three screws of the cover, arrow 1, with the on-board tool. Folding up the floor panel. 2. Push the fastener together and pull up‐ wards, arrow 2. 3. Remove cover from the side, arrow 3. 4. Press on the four fastenings and remove the lid. Details of the fuse assignment are on a separate leaflet. Attach covers 1. When attaching the lid, ensure that all four fastenings are engaged. 2. Attach cover under the rubber lip and then thread between the webs. 3. Press fastening downwards and tighten the three screws. 264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Help in the event of a breakdown Mobility Help in the event of a breakdown Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Hazard warning lights This depends on factors such as the specific mobile phone network and the national regula‐ tions. Emergency call not ensured For technical reasons, it might not be pos‐ sible to make an emergency call in highly ad‐ verse conditions.◀ Subscriber contract ▷ The Service centre can deactivate the BMW Assist system after expiration of the partic‐ ipation contract without you having to visit the workshop. After deactivation of the system, no BMW Assist emergency call is possible. ▷ It is possible that the system can be re-en‐ abled by the Service centre after conclusion of a new contract. The button is located in the centre console. Making an emergency call Emergency call Requirements ▷ Equipment with preparation for mobile phone. An emergency call is also possible when no mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. ▷ BMW Assist is activated. ▷ Radio ready state is switched on. ▷ BMW Assist system is connected to a mo‐ bile communications network supported by BMW Assist. ▷ Emergency call system functional. Press the SOS button in an emergency only. Even if no BMW Assist emergency call is possi‐ ble, in some cases an emergency call may still be set up to a public emergency call number. 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button is illuminated. ▷ LED illuminated: emergency call activated. If a cancellation request is displayed on the control display, the emergency call can be aborted. If the situation permits, wait in the car until voice contact has been established. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 265 Mobility Help in the event of a breakdown ▷ LED flashes when the connection to the emergency number has been established. First-aid kit In the case of a BMW Assist emergency call, the data required to decide on the rescue measures to be taken is transferred to the emergency call centre, for example the cur‐ rent position of the vehicle if this can be de‐ termined. If questions posed by the emer‐ gency call centre remain unanswered, rescue measures are automatically initiated. ▷ If the LED is flashing but the emergency call centre cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. However, the emergency call centre may still be able to hear you speak. Automatically activating emergency calls In certain circumstances, an emergency call may be placed automatically immediately after a serious accident. An automatic emergency call is not influenced by pressing the SOS button. Warning triangle The first-aid kit is located behind the left cover panel in the boot. Turn to open the handle. The longevity of some articles is limited. Check the use-by dates of the contents regu‐ larly and replace any items that have expired. Mobile Service Standby In many countries, the Mobile Service is avail‐ able by phone twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week. This service can render assistance in the event of a breakdown. Breakdown assistance If you need breakdown assistance, see page 223, use the iDrive to view the number or to establish a connection directly to the Mobile Service. Starting assistance The warning triangle is located behind the left cover panel in the boot. Turn to open the handle. To remove, release the mounts of the warning triangle. Notes If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine can be started using two jump leads from an‐ other vehicle’s battery. Use only jump leads with fully insulated terminal clamps. Do not deviate from the procedure described below, as otherwise personal injury could result or both vehicles could be damaged. 266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Help in the event of a breakdown Mobility Do not touch live parts Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident could occur.◀ Preparations 1. Check whether the battery in the other ve‐ hicle shows 12 volts. Specifications are on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle. 3. Switch off any electrical systems in both ve‐ hicles. Avoid contact between the vehicle bodies The bodies of the two vehicles must not make contact, otherwise there is the risk of a short-circuit.◀ Jump-starting connections Order for connecting Connect the jump leads in the correct or‐ der to avoid sparks that could cause injury.◀ The negative terminal is the body earth or a spe‐ cial nut. Connecting the cables 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting assis‐ tance connection. 2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+ jump lead to the positive battery terminal or the corresponding jump-starting connec‐ tion on the donor vehicle. 3. Connect the other terminal clamp to the bat‐ tery’s positive terminal or to the correspond‐ ing jump-starting connection on the vehicle to be started. 4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/– jump lead to the negative battery terminal or the corresponding engine or body earth connection on the donor vehicle. 5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the negative battery terminal or to a ground/ earth connection on the corresponding en‐ gine or body of the vehicle to be started. The jump-starting connection in the engine compartment serves as the positive battery ter‐ minal. Open the cover of the starting assistance con‐ nection. Starting the engine Do not use the spray products sold as starting aids. 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and al‐ low it to run for a few minutes at a slightly increased idle speed. For diesel-engined vehicles to be started: allow the engine of the donor vehicle to run for approx. 10 minutes. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started as normal. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 267 Mobility Help in the event of a breakdown If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, wait several minutes until the flat battery has been recharged to a slightly greater degree. 3. Allow both engines to run for a few minutes. 4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite order from that in which they were originally attached. Manual gearbox Gearshift lever in idle position. Being towed Comply with the instructions for towing/ being towed Check the battery if necessary and have it re‐ charged. Comply with all instructions on towing/being towed; failure to do so could result in damage to the vehicle or an accident.◀ Tow-starting and towing ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on, as otherwise low-beam headlights, rear lights, turn indicators and windscreen wip‐ ers would not be available. Automatic transmission: transporting your vehicle Note Do not attempt to have your vehicle towed. Con‐ sequently, contact your Service centre in the event of a breakdown. Do not tow the vehicle Have your the vehicle transported on a load platform, otherwise damage might result.◀ Towing truck ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise the steering can turn. ▷ When the engine is not running, there is no power assistance and the brake servo is out of action. The steering and brakes will re‐ quire extra effort to operate. ▷ Greater steering wheel movements are nec‐ essary. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be un‐ able to keep the towed vehicle reliably under control. Towing truck Do not raise the vehicle Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.◀ Have your vehicle transported by a towing truck with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading platform. Use the towing eye screwed into the socket at the front of the car for manoeuvring only. 268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Help in the event of a breakdown Do not raise the vehicle Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.◀ Towing other vehicles Mobility Attaching the towing rope correctly Only attach the towing rope to the towing eye. Attaching the towing rope to other parts of the car can result in damage.◀ Towing eye General Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be un‐ able to keep the towed vehicle reliably under control.◀ Attaching the tow bar/towing rope Only attach the tow bar or towing rope to the towing eye. Attaching the towing rope to other parts of the car can result in damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning flashers, de‐ pending on local regulations. ▷ If the car's electrical system has failed, the car being towed must be made identifiable to following vehicles, for instance by placing a notice or the warning triangle in the rear window. Tow bar The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar at an angle, note the following: ▷ Tow bar clearance may be restricted when cornering. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset. Always have the screw-on tow fitting on board the vehicle. It can be screwed into the front or rear end of the BMW. It is located in the tool kit behind the left flap in the boot. Turn to open the handle. Towing eye, information on use ▷ Use only the towing eye supplied with the car, and make sure that it is screwed in fully and is tight. ▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on nor‐ mal roads (i.e. not off-road). ▷ Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, for ex‐ ample do not raise the car at the towing eye. Otherwise the towing eye and the car could be damaged.◀ Screw thread Press the upper edge of the cover to press it out. Towing rope Ensure that the Towing rope is taut when the towing vehicle moves off. For towing, use nylon ropes or straps, as these will help to avoid sudden tensile loads. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 269 Mobility Help in the event of a breakdown Front 4. Tow-start with the clutch depressed and re‐ lease the clutch slowly. Depress the clutch again immediately after the engine starts. 5. Stop in a suitable location, remove the tow bar or towing rope and switch off the hazard warning lights. 6. Have the vehicle checked. Rear Tow-starting Automatic transmission Do not attempt to tow-start or push-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, it is not pos‐ sible to start the engine by towing. Have the cause of the starting difficulties recti‐ fied. Manual gearbox If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine using starting assistance, see page 266. Only tow-start when the engine is cold if your vehicle has a catalytic converter. 1. Switching on hazard warning lights, please observe country-specific regulations. 2. Ignition, see page 57, on. 3. Insert 3rd gear. 270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 General care Mobility General care Vehicle Equipment Automatic car washes. This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Notes Washing the car Notes Steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners If you use steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners, make sure you maintain an adequate distance and a maximum temperature of 60 ℃/140 ℉. With the glass roof keep a distance of at least 80 cm, approx. 31.5 inches. High-pressure jets striking it from close up or with excessively high pressure or temperature could cause damage, or start off a process of long-term damage. Comply with the instructions for the high-pres‐ sure cleaner.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with highpressure cleaners Bear the following in mind: ▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft brushes are preferable, to avoid damage to the paintwork. ▷ Make sure the wheels and tyres are not damaged by the conveying mechanism. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors, as they could otherwise sustain damage due to the car's width. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, see page 62, to avoid unintentional operation of the wipers. ▷ In some instances, depending on the interior movement detector of the alarm system, a false alarm may be triggered. Observe the notes on avoiding false alarms, see page 38. Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes where the guide rails are higher than 10 cm, 4 in as otherwise the car body may be damaged.◀ Entering a car wash Take the following steps so that the vehicle can be driven into a car wash: Do not direct high-pressure cleaners at the sen‐ sors or cameras on the outside of the vehicle for sustained periods and maintain a distance of at least 30 cm, 12 in. This applies to systems such as Park Distance Control.◀ Manual gearbox: Especially in winter, wash the car more fre‐ quently. 4. Stop the engine. Very high levels of dirt and road salt can cause damage to the car. Automatic gearbox: 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Drive into the car wash. 3. Engage idle position. 5. Switch on ignition. 1. Release the parking brake, see page 60. 2. Drive into the car wash. 3. Depress the brake as needed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 271 Mobility General care 4. Engage transmission position N. 5. Stop the engine. In this way the ignition re‐ mains switched on and a Check Control message is displayed. Transmission position P with the igni‐ tion switched off With the ignition switched off, transmission position P is engaged automatically. Make sure that in a car wash, for example, the ig‐ nition is not switched off inadvertently.◀ Care and cleaning products Observe the notes on the pack. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Use only products that are intended for cleaning the car’s interior. Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐ stances or constitute a health risk.◀ Vehicle paintwork It is not possible to lock the vehicle from the out‐ side in transmission position N. Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐ serves your car's value. If an attempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal sounds. Environmental factors can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Base the frequency and extent of ve‐ hicle care on such factors. Transmission position Transmission position P is automatically en‐ gaged: ▷ With the ignition switched off. ▷ After approximately 15 minutes. Headlights ▷ Do not rub them when dry or use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents. ▷ Soak impurities such as insects with sham‐ poo and wash off with water. ▷ Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use an ice scraper. After washing the car After washing the car, drive it briefly and apply the brakes to dry them out; this is necessary to prevent reduced braking action, and also to avoid corrosion of the brake discs. Remove dust from the leather at regular inter‐ vals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Dust and road dirt will otherwise become worked into pores and folds, causing consider‐ able abrasion and causing the leather surface to become prematurely brittle. In order to protect against discolouration, for ex‐ ample from clothing, clean the leather approxi‐ mately every two months. Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as it has the tendency to soil faster. Use leather cleaner, as dirt and grease with oth‐ erwise attack the protective coating of the leather. Suitable cleaner can be obtained from a Service centre. Care of upholstery fabrics Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Car care Care products BMW recommends that you use BMW cleaning and care products, as these have been tested and approved. 272 Leather care In the event of heavy soiling, for example stains caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-free microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning agents. Clean upholstery materials over a large area up to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 General care Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on trousers or other items of clothing can damage seat covers. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on your clothing are closed.◀ Care of special parts Light alloy wheels Apply wheel cleaner, particularly during the win‐ ter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strong alkali and abrasive cleaning agents, or steam-jet cleaners at above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Chrome surfaces Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille and door handles with plenty of water to which a shampoo may be added, particularly if ex‐ posed to road salt. Rubber parts Other than washing with water, treat only with rubber care products. Do not use any silicone-based care products for treating rubber seals, as these could otherwise be damaged and become a source of noise. Fine wood parts Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts only with a damp cloth. Then dry them with a soft cloth. Plastic parts These include: ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ▷ Roof lining. ▷ Light covers. ▷ Glass cover of instrument cluster. ▷ Parts sprayed matt black. ▷ Painted parts in the interior. Use a microfibre cloth to clean. Mobility Slightly moisten the cloth with water. Do not soak the roof lining. No cleaning agents containing alcohol/ solvent Do not use any alcohol-based or solvent-based cleaning agents such as nitro thinners, cold cleansers, fuel or similar, as otherwise the sur‐ faces can be damaged.◀ Seat belts Dirt on the seat belts can interfere with the ac‐ tion of the reel and represent a safety hazard. Dry cleaning Do not dry-clean or use chemical prod‐ ucts, otherwise the fabric may be weakened.◀ Clean only with a mild soap solution while still fitted to the car. Never allow seat belts to retract unless they are dry. Floor carpets and foot mats No objects in the range of movement of the pedals Foot mats, carpets or other objects must not breach the range of movement of the pedals, as otherwise they could influence the function of the pedals when driving. Do not place additional foot mats on top of ex‐ isting floor mats or other similar objects. Only use foot mats that have been approved for the vehicle and that can be fastened accord‐ ingly. Ensure that floor mats are securely reattached after having been removed, for example for cleaning.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car to en‐ able the interior to be cleaned more thoroughly. In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor carpets using a microfibre cloth and water or textile cleaner. In doing so, rub back and forth in the Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 273 Mobility General care direction of travel, as otherwise the carpet can become tangled. Trailer tow hitch with removal ball linkage Laying up out of use Your Service centre will be pleased to advise you on the measures that should be taken if the ve‐ hicle is to be placed in storage for longer than three months. Keep the ball linkage and take-up clean. Grease or oil bearing locations, sliding surfaces and the small balls on the take-up piston regu‐ larly with resin-free grease or oil. Before using steam cleaner or high pressure cleaner on the vehicle, remove ball linkage and use a stopper in the take-up, see page 139. Do not clean ball linkage with a steam cleaner or high pressure cleaner. Sensors/cameras Clean sensors or cameras using a cloth mois‐ tened with a small amount of a glass-cleaning product. Displays/screens Clean displays using anti-static microfibre cloth. Cleaning of displays Do not use any chemical or domestic cleaning agents. Keep all liquids away from the set. Surfaces or electrical components could other‐ wise be attacked or damaged. Avoid applying excessive pressure when clean‐ ing and do not use abrasive materials, otherwise damage could occur.◀ Specifics on the control display If necessary, to clean the control display, you can also use glass cleaner with a damp microfi‐ bre cloth. Only slightly dampen the microfibre cloth Only slightly dampen the microfibre cloth, otherwise damage can be caused.◀ Suitable glass cleaner can be obtained from the Service centre. 274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 General care Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Mobility 275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Reference This chapter contains the technical data, the short commands for the voice control system and the index, which provides the quickest way to find the information you need. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle Equipment This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Dimensions Note The dimensions are applicable for the vehicle without special equipment. Width, height 1 Vehicle height without roof aerial: 1421 mm 3 Vehicle width, with exterior mirror: 1984 mm Vehicle height with roof aerial: 1440 mm 2 Vehicle width, without exterior mirror: 1765 mm 278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Technical data Reference Length, wheelbase 1 Wheelbase: 2690 mm 2 Vehicle length: 4324 mm Smallest turning circle Ø: 10.90 m or 36 ft Weights Values in front of the / are for vehicles with man‐ ual transmission, values after the / are for vehi‐ cles with automatic transmission. 116i Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1365/1385 (3009/3053) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1820/1840 (4012/4056) Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 865 (1906) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1040 (2292) Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 279 Reference Technical data 116i Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 118i Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1370/1390 (3020/3064) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1825/1845 (4023/4067) Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 870 (1918) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1040 (2292) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 125i Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1420/1440 (3130/3174) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1875/1895 (4133/4177) Load kg (lb) 500 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 885/895 (1951/1973) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1070 (2358) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 116d Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1385/1420 (3053/3130) Permitted gross weight 1840/1875 (4056/4133) 280 kg (lb) Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Technical data Reference 116d Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 885 (1951) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1055 (2325) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 116ed Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1385 (3053) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1840 (4056) Load kg (lb) 500 (1102) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 875 (1929) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1055 (2325) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 118d Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1395/1420 (3075/3130) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1850/1875 (4078/4133) Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 885 (1951) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1055 (2325) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 281 Reference Technical data 120d Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1420/1440 (3130/3174) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1875/1895 (4133/4177) Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 905 (1995) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1065 (2347) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) 125d Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank kg (lb) 90 % full, no optional extras 1465/1480 (3229/3262) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1920/1935 (4232/4265) Load kg (lb) 530 (1168) Front axle load limit kg (lb) 890/895 (1962/1973) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1085/1090 (2380/2403) Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165) Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 360–1200 (12.7–42.3) Towing a trailer Values in front of the / are for vehicles with man‐ ual transmission, values after the / are for vehi‐ cles with automatic transmission. 116i Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked 282 kg (lb) 650 (1433) Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Technical data Reference 116i With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1150 (2535) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1895/1915 (4177/4221) 118i Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 670 (1477) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1150 (2535) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1900/1920 (4188/4232) 125i Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 680 (1499) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1180 (2601) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1950/1970 (4299/4343) Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 283 Reference Technical data 116d Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 690 (1521) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1165 (2568) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1915/1950 (4221/4299) 118d Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 690 (1521) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1165 (2568) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1925/1950 (4243/4299) 120d Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 710 (1565) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) 284 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Technical data Reference 120d Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1180 (2601) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1950/1970 (4299/4343) 125d Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service centre will have details of possible increases. Unbraked kg (lb) 740 (1631) With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) 1200 (2645) Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165) Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1195/1200 (2634/2645) Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1995/2010 (4398/4431) Filling capacities litres / Imp. units Note Fuel tank 52/11.4 gal Fuel grade, see page 236 Windscreen and headlight washer system 3/5.2 pints Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 285 Reference Short commands of the voice control system Short commands of the voice control system Vehicle Equipment General This chapter describes all standard, national and special equipment provided in the model series. Therefore equipment not available in a vehicle is also described, for example the selected special equipment or national version. That also applies to safety-relevant functions and systems. Instructions for the voice control system, see page 21. Have possible voice commands read aloud: ›Voice commands‹ Settings Vehicle Function Command Call up the main menu. ›Main menu‹ Call up options. ›Options‹ Call up settings. ›Settings‹ Information display in the instrument cluster. ›Info display‹ Control display settings. ›Control display‹ Call up time and date. ›Time and date‹ Call up language and units. ›Language and units‹ Call up speed limit. ›Speed‹ Call up lights. ›Lights‹ Call up door lock. ›Door locks‹ Call up profiles. ›Profiles‹ Call up drive mode menu. ›Driving mode‹ Call up ECO PRO menu. ›ECO PRO mode‹ 286 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Short commands of the voice control system Reference Equipment Function Command Call up climate control. ›Climate‹ Vehicle information Owner's Handbook Function Command Call up Owner's Handbook. ›Show Owner's Handbook‹ Call up quick reference. ›Quick reference‹ Call up keyword search. ›Owner's Handbook‹ Call up search by graphics. ›Search by pictures‹ On-board computer Function Command Call up on-board computer. ›On board computer‹ Call up journey computer. ›Journey computer‹ Vehicle Function Command Call up vehicle information. ›Vehicle information‹ Call up vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹ Call up sport displays. ›Sport displays‹ Call up ECO PRO tips. ›ECO PRO tips‹ Call up the EfficientDynamics menu. ›Efficient Dynamics‹ EfficientDynamics splitscreen. ›Splitscreen Efficient Dynamics‹ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 287 Reference Short commands of the voice control system Navigation General Function Command Calls up the Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹ Call up destination input. ›Destination input‹ Entering an address. ›Destination input‹ Entering a town/city. ›City‹ Entering a country. ›Country‹ Entering the postcode ›Postcode‹ Call up route guidance. ›Guidance‹ Start route guidance. ›Start guidance‹ End route guidance. ›Stop guidance‹ Call up home address. ›Home address‹ Call up route criteria. ›Route criteria‹ Call up course of route. ›Route profile‹ Switch on spoken instructions. ›Switch on spoken instructions‹ Repeat spoken instructions. ›Repeat spoken instructions‹ Switch off spoken instructions. ›Switch off spoken instructions‹ Show address book. ›Address book‹ Show last destinations. ›Last destinations‹ Call up traffic information. ›Traffic information‹ Points of interest. ›Points of interest‹ Map Function Command Show map. ›Map‹ Map pointing towards north. ›Map north oriented‹ Map pointing towards direction of travel. ›Map indicating direction of travel‹ 288 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Short commands of the voice control system Reference Function Command Map in perspective. ›Map perspective‹ Map with automatic scaling. ›Map automatic scaling‹ Scale...metres. ›Map scale ... metres‹, for example map scale 100 metres Scale...kilometres. ›Map scale ... kilometres‹, for example map scale 5 kilometres Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹, for example map scale 5 miles Scale...yards. ›Map scale ... yards‹, for example map scale 100 yards Split screen settings Function Command Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹ Switch off split screen. ›Switch off splitscreen‹ Adapt split screen sizes. ›Split screen display‹ Split screen map pointing towards north. ›Splitscreen map north oriented‹ Split screen current position. ›Splitscreen current position‹ Split screen pointing towards direction of travel. ›Splitscreen map direction of travel oriented‹ Split screen perspective. ›Splitscreen perspective‹ Split screen, increased junction zoom. ›Splitscreen 3 D exit roads‹ Split screen scale...metres. ›Splitscreen scale ... metres‹, for example split screen scale 100 metres Split screen scale...kilometres. ›Splitscreen scale ... kilometres‹, for example split screen scale 5 kilometres Split screen scale...miles. ›Splitscreen scale ... miles‹, for example split screen scale 5 miles Split screen scale...yards. ›Splitscreen scale ... yards‹, for example split screen scale 100 yards Split screen, highlight traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic situation‹ Split screen on-board computer. ›Splitscreen on board computer‹ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 289 Reference Short commands of the voice control system Function Command Split screen journey on-board computer. ›Splitscreen Journey computer‹ Automatically scale split screen. ›Splitscreen automatic scaling‹ Route guidance with intermediate destinations Function Command New destination input. ›Destination input‹ Trip list. ›Saved journeys‹ Radio FM Function Command Call up station directly. ›Station ...‹ for example, Classic Radio station Call up frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹, for example 93.5 Megahertz or frequency 93.5 Call up radio. ›Radio‹ Call up FM stations. ›F M‹ Call up manual search. ›Manual search‹ Select frequency. ›Select frequency‹ Call up station. ›Select station‹ AM Function Command Call up frequency. ›Frequency ... kilohertz‹, for example frequency 753 or 753 Kilohertz Call up AM stations. ›A M‹ Call up manual search. ›Manual search‹ 290 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Short commands of the voice control system Reference DAB Function Command Call up station directly. ›Station ...‹, for example station B5 plus Call up digital radio. ›D A B‹ Switch on digital radio. ›D A B on‹ Saved stations Function Command Call up saved stations. ›Saved stations‹ Choose saved station. ›Select saved station‹ Select saved station. ›Saved station ...‹, for example saved station 2 CD/multimedia CD/DVD player Function Command Select track. ›Track ...‹, for example Track 5 or ›C D track ...‹, for example CD Track 5 Play CD. ›C D on‹ Select CD. ›Select C D‹ Select CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹, for example CD 3 Track 5 Call up CD and multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹ CD and DVD. ›C D‹ Select DVD. ›D V D ...‹ for example DVD 3 Show entertainment details in split screen. ›Entertainment details‹ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 291 Reference Short commands of the voice control system Music collection Function Command Call up music search, menu. ›Music search‹ Call up current playback. ›Current playback‹ Call up music collection. ›Music collection‹ Play music collection. ›Music collection on‹ Play most played tracks. ›Top fifty‹ External devices Function Command Call up external devices. ›External devices‹ Call up Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹ AUX front. ›AUX front‹ Sound Function Command Call up sound. ›Tone‹ Telephone Function Command Dial phone number. ›Dial number‹ Calls up the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹ Show phonebook. ›Phonebook‹ Redialling. ›Redial‹ Show missed calls. ›Received calls‹ List of messages. ›Messages‹ Call up Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹ 292 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 Short commands of the voice control system Reference Office Function Command Call up office menu. ›Office‹ Show office update. ›Office today‹ Show contacts. ›Contacts‹ Show messages. ›Messages‹ Show calendar. ›Calendar‹ Show tasks. ›Tasks‹ Show reminders. ›Reminders‹ Contacts Function Command Select name. ›Select name‹ My contacts. ›My contacts‹ Call up contacts. ›Contacts‹ New contact. ›New contact‹ BMW Service or ConnectedDrive Function Command Call up BMW services. ›B M W Services‹ Call up connected drive. ›Connected Drive‹ Call up BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹ Call up Internet. ›Internet‹ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 293 Reference From A to Z From A to Z Index A ABS, anti-lock braking sys‐ tem 98 Accessories and parts 7 Activating/deactivating Blue‐ tooth link 201 Activation, airbags 92 Adaptive Headlights 85 Additional telephone 200 Additives, oil 249 After washing the car 272 Age of tyres 239 Airbags 90 Airbags, indicator/warning light 91 Airbag switch, see Key switch for front passenger air‐ bags 92 Air conditioning 118 Air Conditioning 116 Air conditioning system 116 Air distribution, man‐ ual 116, 119 Air flow, air conditioning 117 Air flow, automatic air condi‐ tioning 120 Air outlets, see Ventila‐ tion 120 Air pressure, tyres 238 Alarm, false 38 Alarm system 37 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 240 Alternative oil grades 250 AM-/FM stations 170 Anti-freeze protection, washer fluid 64 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 98 294 Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 37 Anti-theft device, see Central locking system 31 Anti-theft system, wheel studs 262 Anti-trap mechanism, glass roof 41 Anti-trap mechanism, win‐ dows 39 Applications 230 Appointments 216 Apps 230 Apps, video playback 191 Aquaplaning 133 Armrest, see Centre arm‐ rest 127 Around the centre console 12 Around the headlining 13 Around the steering wheel 10 Arrival time 79 Ashtray 122 Assist, BMW 222 AUC, automatic air recircula‐ tion control 119 Audio playback, Blue‐ tooth 192 AUTO intensity 119 Automatic air condition‐ ing 118 Automatic air recirculation control, AUC 119 Automatic anti-glare control, see High-beam assis‐ tance 85 Automatic driving lights con‐ trol 84 Automatic locking 35 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 AUTO program, automatic air conditioning 118 AUTO program, intensity 119 Auto Start Stop function 59 AUX-IN port 188 Average fuel consumption 78 Average speed 78 Avoiding routes 157 Axle load limit 279 Axle loads, weight 279 B Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 44 Backrest width 44 Balance 168 Bar for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 269 Bass 168 Battery, vehicle 263 Being towed, see Tow-start‐ ing/towing 268 Belts, seat belts 45 Block, power windows 40 Blower, see air flow 117 Blower, see Air flow 120 Bluetooth audio 192 BMW Assist 222 BMW homepage 6 BMW internet site 6 BMW Live 225 BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem 252 BMW Online 224 BMW TeleServices 222 Bonnet 246 Boot 123 Boot cover 123 Boot lid 35 Boot, storage space 129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 From A to Z Bottle holder, see Cu‐ pholder 128 Brake assist 98 Braking, notes 133 Braking safely 133 Breakdown Assist 265 Breakdown assistance 223 Breakdown service, Mobile Service 266 Breakdown, wheel change 262 Brightness of the control dis‐ play 81 Bulb change, xenon head‐ light 259 Bulbs 83 Buttons on the steering wheel 10 Button, start/stop 57 Bypassing a section of the route 158 C Calendar 216 Camera, rear-view cam‐ era 111 Cameras, care 274 Car care 272 Care products 272 Care, vehicle 272 Car jack 262 Car key, see Remote con‐ trol 28 Carpet, care 273 Carrying children in safety 52 Car washes 271 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 133 CBS, Condition Based Serv‐ ice 252 CD/DVD 176 CD memory 183 Central key, see Remote con‐ trol 28 Central locking system 31 Central screen, see Control display 14 Centre armrest 127 Centre console 12 Changes, technical, see Your own safety 7 Changing bulb, rear 260 Changing the scale in naviga‐ tion system 160 Charcoal canister 120 Check Control 70 Child locks 56 Children, carrying 52 Child restraint systems 52 Child seat classes, ISOFIX 53 Child seat mounting 52 Child seat mountings, ISO‐ FIX 53 Child’s seats 52 Chrome parts, care 273 Cigarette lighter 122 City input, navigation 149 Clock 73 Closing/opening from in‐ side 34 Closing/opening via door lock 34 Closing/opening with remote control 32 Coat hooks 128 Cold start, see Engine start 58 Comfort Access 36 Comfort closing 33 Comfort opening 32 COMFORT program, driving dynamics 100 Compressor 242 Computer, see On-board computer 78 Condensate under the vehi‐ cle 134 Condensation on win‐ dows 117, 120 Condition Based Service, CBS 252 Reference Confirmation signals 33 Contacts 211, 0 Control display 14 Control display, settings 80 Controller 14, 15 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 98 Coolant 251 Coolant temperature 72 Cooling effect, maximum 119 Cooling function 117, 119 Cooling system 251 Corrosion of brake discs 134 Country selection, naviga‐ tion 148 Course of route 158 Cruise Control 104 Cupholder 128 Current fuel consumption 73 D DAB, digital radio 172 Damage, tyres 239 Data, technical 278 Date 73 Daytime driving lights 84 Deactivation, airbags 92 Defrosting, see Defrosting windows 120 Defrosting windows 117, 120 Defrost, see Defrosting win‐ dows 120 Destination input, naviga‐ tion 148 Diesel fuel 236 Diesel particle filter 133 Digital clock 73 Digital radio, DAB/DMB 172 Dimensions 278 Dimmable exterior mirrors 50 Dimming interior mirror 51 Dipping headlights, see Highbeam assistance 85 Display cleaning 274 Displaying the route 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 295 Reference From A to Z Display lighting, see Instru‐ ment lighting 88 Display of faults, see Check Control 70 Displays 67 Displays, care 274 Displays, cleaning 274 Disposal, coolant 251 Disposal, vehicle battery 263 Distance to destination 79 Distance warning, see PDC 106 DMB, digital radio 172 Door key, see Remote con‐ trol 28 Door lock 34 Downhill gradients 134 Drinks holder, see Cu‐ pholder 128 Drive experience switch 99 Drive-off assistant 101 Driving hints 132 Driving into a car wash 271 Driving lane lines, rear-view camera 110 Driving lights control, auto‐ matic 84 Driving notes, general 132 Driving notes, running in 132 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 98 Drying air, see Cooling func‐ tion 117, 119 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 98 DTC, Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 99 DVD/CD 176 DVD changer 180 DVD settings 179 DVD, video 178 Dynamic route guidance 164 Dynamic Stability Control, DSC 98 Dynamic Traction Control, DTC 99 296 E ECO PRO 143 ECO PRO display 143 ECO PRO mode 143 EfficientDynamics 145 EfficientDynamics menu 145 EfficientDynamics menu, see ECO PRO 143 Electrical glass roof 40 Electrical power windows 38 Electric steering wheel lock 51 Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster 69 Electronic oil level check 248 Electronic Stability Program, ESP, see DSC 98 Emergency call 265 Emergency detection, remote control 29 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 234 Emergency service, see Mo‐ bile Service 266 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 29 Emergency unlocking, door lock 34 Energy Control 73 Energy recuperation 74 Engine, automatic shutoff 59 Engine, automatic start-stop function 59 Engine compartment 246 Engine coolant 251 Engine oil 248 Engine oil additives 249 Engine oil change 250 Engine oil filler neck 249 Engine oil grades, alterna‐ tive 250 Engine oil grades, ap‐ proved 249 Engine oils, approved 249 Engine start 58 Engine start with malfunc‐ tion 29 Entering letters and digits 20 ESP, Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, see DSC 98 Exhaust system 133 Extended BMW Online serv‐ ices 231 Exterior mirror, automatically dimming 50 Exterior mirrors 49 External devices 188 External starting 266 Eye for towing, see Towing eye 269 Eyes for securing load 135 F Fader 168 Failure message, see Check Control 70 False alarm 38 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 45 Favourites buttons, iDrive 19 Filler neck for engine oil 249 Fine wood, care 273 First-aid kit 266 Flat tyre, warning lamp 93 Flooding 133 Floor carpet, care 273 FM-/AM stations 170 Fog lights, replacing bulbs 259 Fold-out position, windscreen wipers 63 Foot brake 133 Foot mats, care 273 Front airbags 90 Front fog lights 87 Front head restraints 47 Front lights 256 Front neck supports, see Head restraints 47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 From A to Z Front passenger airbags, de‐ activating/activating 92 Front passenger airbags, light 92 Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ age fuel consumption 78 Fuel filler flap 234 Fuel gauge 72 Fuel grade 236 Fuel tank cap 234 Fuel, tank capacity 285 Fuse 263 G Gearbox, manual gearbox 64 Gear change, automatic trans‐ mission 65 Gearshift, automatic transmis‐ sion 64 General driving notes 132 Glass roof, electric 40 Glove box 126 Gong, speaker equalisa‐ tion 168 GPS navigation 148 Green diesel 236 Guided tour 156 H Halogen headlights 256 Handbrake, see Parking brake 60 Hazard warning lights 265 Head airbags 90 Head Light 85 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture 84 Headlight flasher 62 Headlight lens 256 Headlights 256 Headlights, care 272 Headlight washer system 62 Headlining 13 Head restraints 42 Heated rear window 117, 120 Heavy transported load, load‐ ing 135 Height, vehicle 278 Help in driving off 101 High-beam assistance 85 High-beam headlights 62 Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off assistant 101 Hints 6 Homepage 6 Horn 10 Hot exhaust system 133 Hotline 228 House number, input for navi‐ gation 149 I Ice warning, see Outside tem‐ perature warning 73 Icy roads, see Outside temper‐ ature warning 73 Identification number, see Im‐ portant to Know in the Engine Compartment 246 iDrive 14 Ignition key, see Remote con‐ trol 28 Ignition off 57 Ignition on 57 Important considerations 52 Important information regard‐ ing the engine compart‐ ment 246 Importing a trip, online 156 Importing a trip, USB 156 Independent ventilation 121 Indication of a flat tyre 93 Indicators, see Turn indica‐ tors 61 Individual air distribu‐ tion 116, 119 Individual settings, see Per‐ sonal Profile 29 Inflation pressure, tyres 238 Reference Inflation pressure warning, tyres 93 Info Display, see On-board computer 78 Information on navigation data 164 Information on no passing 76 Information on speed limit 76 Information service 222 Initialising, runflat indicator, RPA 93 Instrument cluster 67 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 69 Instrument cluster switch, see Turn indicators 61 Instrument cluster switch, see Wiper system 62 Instrument cluster with exten‐ ded functionality 67 Instrument lighting 88 Integrated key 28 Intensity, AUTO program 119 Interactive map 153 Interior light 88 Interior lights via remote con‐ trol 33 Interior mirror 51 Interior mirror, automaticdim 51 Interior movement detec‐ tor 38 Intermediate destinations 155 Internet 226 Internet site 6 Interval display, service re‐ quirement 74 iPod/iPhone 189 ISOFIX child seat mount‐ ings 53 J Jack mounting points 262 Journey computer 79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 297 Reference From A to Z Joystick, automatic transmis‐ sion 65 Jump-starting connection, starting assistance 267 Jump starting, see starting as‐ sistance 266 Junction, entering for naviga‐ tion 149 K Key/remote control 28 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ cess 36 Key memory, see Personal Profile 29 Key switch for front passenger airbags 92 Kick-down, automatic trans‐ mission 65 L Label, run-flat tyres 241 Lane boundary, warning 95 Lane departure warning 95 Language, on the control dis‐ play 81 Lashing eyes, securing load 135 Lashing straps, securing load 135 Laying up out of use 274 Laying up, vehicle 274 Leather, care 272 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 256 Left-hand traffic, light set‐ ting 87 Length, vehicle 279 Light alloy wheels, care 273 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 256 Lighter 122 Lighting 83 Lighting via remote control 33 298 Lights and light bulbs 256 Light switch 83 Loads 135 Lock, door 34 Locking/unlocking from in‐ side 34 Locking/unlocking via door lock 34 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 32 Locking, automatic 35 Locking, central 31 Locking, doors and win‐ dows 56 Lock, wheel studs 262 Low-beam headlights 83 Lower back support 44 Luggage net 125 Luggage rack, see Roof rack 136 Lumbar support 44 M Maintenance 252 Maintenance require‐ ment 252 Maintenance, service require‐ ment 74 Maintenance System BMW 252 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 70 Manual air distribu‐ tion 116, 119 Manual air flow 117, 120 Manual gearbox 64 Manual operation, door lock 34 Manual operation, exterior mir‐ rors 50 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 234 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control, PDC 108 Manual operation, rear-view camera 109 Manual operation, transmis‐ sion 65 Map, destination input 153 Map in the split screen 161 Map view 159 Markings on approved tyres 240 Maximum cooling effect 119 Memory, seat, mirror 49 Menu in the instrument clus‐ ter 77 Menus, see iDrive operating principle 16 Message list, traffic informa‐ tion 162 Messages 213 Microfilter 117, 120 Minimum tread depth, tyres 239 Mirror, memory 49 Mirrors 49 Mobile communication equip‐ ment 133 Mobile phone 200 Mobile Service 266 Mobility system 242 Moisture in the headlight 256 Monitor, see Control dis‐ play 14 Mounting child restraints 52 MP3 player 188 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 10 Music collection 183 Music memory 183 Music search 184 N Navigation 148 Navigation announcement, see Voice instructions 159 Navigation data 164 New wheels and tyres 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 From A to Z No Passing Information 76 Nose weight 282 Notes 217 Notes regarding CD/DVD 182 Nylon ropes for tow-starting/ towing 269 O OBD on-board diagnosis 254 Obstacle marking, rear-view camera 110 Octane number, see Petrol grade 236 Odometer 72 Office 210 Oil 248 Oil additives 249 Oil change 250 Oil change interval, service re‐ quirement 74 Oil filler neck 249 Oil grades, alternative 250 Oil grades, approved 249 Oil grades, prescribed 249 Oil level check 248 Old battery, disposing 263 On-board computer 78 On-board diagnosis, OBD 254 On-board monitor, see Control display 14 On-board tool kit 255 Online, see BMW Online 224 Opening/closing from in‐ side 34 Opening/closing via door lock 34 Opening/closing with remote control 32 Operating menus, iDrive 14 Operating principle, iDrive 14 Outside air, see AUC 119 Outside temperature dis‐ play 73 Outside temperature warn‐ ing 73 Overheating of the engine, see Coolant temperature 72 P Paintwork, vehicle 272 Park assistant 112 Park Distance Control, PDC 106 Parked vehicle, conden‐ sate 134 Parking aid, see PDC 106 Parking assistant 112 Parking brake 60 Parking lights 84 Parking position 50 Particle filter 133 Part replacement 255 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger's mirror, tilting down 50 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 106 Permitted gross weight while towing a trailer 282 Personal information 210 Personal Profile 29 Petrol 236 Petrol grade 236 Place for children 52 Plasters, see First-aid kit 266 Plastic, care 273 Playing audio tracks 177 PlugIn 230 Pockets in the doors 127 Points of interest, naviga‐ tion 151 Postcode input, naviga‐ tion 149 Power failure 263 Power socket 122 Power windows 38 Pressure, tyres 238 Pressure warning, tyres 93 Reference Profiles, Personal Profile 29 Protection function, glass roof 41 Protection function, win‐ dows 39 Puncture, runflat indicator, RPA 93 R Radio 170, 176 Radio-control key, see Re‐ mote control 28 Radio ready state 58 Radio signals 133 Radio station buttons 174 Rain sensor 62 Random 177 Random playback 177 Range 73 Rape seed methyl ester, RME 236 RDS 171 Readiness service, see Mobile Service 266 Reading out 218 Rear fog lights 87 Rear head restraints 47 Rear lights 260 Rear neck supports, see Head restraints 47 Rear-view camera 109 Recirculated-air mode 117, 119 Recirculating air filter 120 Recirculation, see Recircula‐ ted-air mode 117, 119 Recommended tours 156 Recommended tyre makes 240 Recycling 254 Refuelling 234 Refuelling recommenda‐ tion 159 Regional programmes 171 Registering, mobile 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 299 Reference From A to Z Register mobile 201 Remaining distance 73 Remedying punctures 241 Reminders 217 Remote control/key 28 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 34 Rename station 171 Replacement fuse 263 Replacement of parts 255 Replacement of wheels/ tyres 240 Replacing bulbs 256 Replacing bulbs, front 256 Replacing parts 255 Replacing the battery, vehicle battery 263 Replacing the battery, vehicle remote control 28 Replacing wiper blades 255 Reserve warning, see Range 73 Restraint systems for chil‐ dren 52 Retreaded tyres 240 Reuse 254 Reversing light 260 Revolution counter 72 Right-hand traffic, light set‐ ting 87 RME, rape seed methyl es‐ ter 236 RON petrol grade 236 Roof load 279 Roof rack 136 Rope for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 269 Route criteria, route 157 Route guidance 157 Route guidance with inter‐ mediate destinations 155 RPA, runflat indicator 93 RSC Runflat System Compo‐ nent, see Run-flat tyres 241 Rubber parts, care 273 Runflat indicator, RPA 93 300 Run-flat tyres 241 Running in 132 Running in brake discs 132 Running in brake pads 132 Run up warning 103 S Safe seated position 42 Safety switch, windows 40 Safety systems, airbags 90 Saved stations 174 Saving current position 150 Saving DVDs 183 Saving fuel 0 Saving position 150 Saving settings for seat, mir‐ ror 49 Saving stations 170 Screen, see Control dis‐ play 14 Screwdriver 255 Screw thread for towing eye 269 Sealing compound 242 Seat and mirror memory 49 Seat belt reminder for driver's and front passenger's seat 46 Seat belt reminder for rear seats 46 Seat belts 45 Seat belts, care 273 Seat heating, front 45 Seats 42 Selection list in the instrument cluster 77 Selector lever, automatic transmission 65 Sensors, care 274 Service history 75 Service, Mobile 266 Service partners 229 Service requirement, Condi‐ tion Based Service CBS 252 Service requirement, dis‐ play 74 Settings on the control dis‐ play 80 Settings, seats/head re‐ straints 42 Shift paddle on the steering wheel 66 Shift point indicator 75 Short commands 286 Side airbags 90 Side lights 83 Signals on unlocking 33 Sliding/tilting roof 40 Smallest turning circle 279 Snap-in adapter, mobile phone 209 Snow chains 244 Socket in rear passenger com‐ partment 123 Socket, on-board diagnosis OBD 254 Software applications, iPhone 230 Software update, update soft‐ ware 195 Soot particle filter 133 Sound 168 Spare fuse 263 Special equipment, standard equipment 6 Speed, displaying maxi‐ mum 76 Speed limit, can be set 96 Speed limit device, see Speed limit 96 Speed Limit Information 76 Speed limit information, onboard computer 79 Speed limit in on-board com‐ puter 79 Speed limit that can be set 96 Speed Volume, speaker equal‐ isation 168 Split screen 19 Split screen map settings 161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 From A to Z Split screen view, split screen 19 SPORT+ program, driving dy‐ namics 100 Sport automatic transmis‐ sion 66 Sport displays, torque display, power display 80 SPORT program, driving dy‐ namics 100 Sport program, transmis‐ sion 65 Sports steering, variable 99 Stability control systems 98 Start/stop button 57 Start function with malfunc‐ tion 29 Starting assistance 266 Starting assistance, see DSC 98 Starting, see Engine start 58 Starting the engine 58 Starting the engine, starting assistance 266 Stations AM-/FM 170 Status information, iDrive 18 Status of the Owner's Handbook 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 51 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ mission 64 Stopping the engine 58 Storage compartment in the rear 128 Storage compartments 126 Storage options 126 Storage, tyres 241 Storage, vehicle 274 Street, entering for naviga‐ tion 149 Summer tyres, tread 239 Supplementary text mes‐ sages 71 Swinging of the trailer, see Trailer Stability Control 139 Switches, see Driving area 10 Switch for driving dynam‐ ics 99 Switching off the engine 58 Switch-on times, independent ventilation 121 Symbols 6 Symbols used 6 T Tailgate 35 Tailgate via remote control 33 Tail lights 260 Tank display 72 Tasks 216 Technical changes, see Your own safety 7 Technical data 278 Telephone 200 TeleServices 222 Temperature, air condition‐ ing 117 Temperature, automatic air conditioning 118 Temperature display, outside temperature 73 Tensioning bands, securing load 135 Text messages 213 Text messages, supplemen‐ tary 71 The map is shown in grey 163 Thiefproof wheel studs 262 Thigh support 44 Tilt alarm sensor 38 Tilting down, passenger's mir‐ ror 50 Toll routes, route 157 Tools 255 Topping up engine oil 249 Top speed, winter tyres 241 Total weight 279 Total weight, permitted 279 Tourist function, see Lefthand/right-hand traffic 87 Towing 268 Reference Towing eye 269 Towing truck 268 Tow-starting 268 TP, traffic announce‐ ments 174 Traction control 99 TRACTION program, driving dynamics 99 Traffic information, Naviga‐ tion 162 Traffic reports 174 Trailer loads 282 Trailer Stability Control 139 Trailer tow hitch 139 Trailer tow hitch, care 274 Trailer towing, data 282 Transmission 64 Transmission, automatic 64 Tread, tyres 239 Treble, sound 168 Trip distance recorder 72 Triple turn signal 61 Turn indicator rear, changing bulb 260 Turn indicators, operation 61 Turning circle 279 Turning circle lines, rear-view camera 110 Tyre damage 239 Tyre pressure monitoring, see RPA 93 Tyre pressures 238 Tyre replacement 240 Tyre sealant 242 Tyres, everything about wheels and tyres 238 Tyre tread 239 U Units of measure 81 Unloaded weight 279 Unlock button, automatic transmission 65 Unlocking/locking from in‐ side 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 301 Reference From A to Z Unlocking/locking via door lock 34 Unlocking/locking with remote control 32 Updates after going to press 7 Upholstery care 272 USB audio interface 189 USB interface 127 V Variable sports steering 99 Vehicle battery 263 Vehicle battery, changing 263 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle for tow-starting/tow‐ ing 268 Vehicle identification number, see Identification number in the engine compart‐ ment 246 Vehicle paintwork 272 Vehicle, running in 132 Ventilation 120 Ventilation, see Independent ventilation 121 Version of navigation data 164 Video playback, iPhone 191 Video playback, snap-in adapter 191 Video replay 178 Voice control, short com‐ mands 286 Voice control system 21 Voice instructions, naviga‐ tion 159 Volume, adjusting 168 W Washer fluid 64 Washer fluid tank, ca‐ pacity 285 Washer jets, windows 63 Washing the car 271 Water on roads 133 Weights 279 Welcome lights 83 Wheelbase, vehicle 279 Wheel change 262 Wheel replacement 240 Wheels, everything about wheels and tyres 238 Wheels, runflat indicator, RPA 93 Width, vehicle 278 Windscreen washer jets 63 Windscreen washing sys‐ tem 62 Windscreen wipers 62 Windscreen wipers, fold-out position 63 Winter-grade diesel 236 Winter storage, care and main‐ tenance 274 Winter tyres, right tyres 240 Winter tyres, tread 239 Wiper system 62 Wood, care 273 Wordmatch principle, naviga‐ tion 20 Working in the engine com‐ partment 246 Wrench 255 X Xenon light, bulb change 259 Y Your own safety 7 Wading 133 Warning messages, see Check Control 70 Warning triangle 266 302 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490 More about BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 40 2 900 802 en www.bmw.com *BL290080200R* Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 802 - 03 12 490